Series I 1

Series/1
Digest----= ---:-::E--_.--_.-

Series/l
DigestSeries/1

Twelfth Edition (March 1987)
This is a major revision of, and obsoletes, G360-0061-10. Information for Series/1 products andservices is included as of January 1987. Prices for these products are in the IBM Series /l Pocket
Digest, GX34-0104. Changes will be periodically made to the information herein; any such changes
will be reported in subsequent revisions or supplements.
It is possible that this material may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products(machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Suchreferences or information should not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM
products, programming, or services in your country.
The term network has at least two meanings. A public network is a network established and operated
by common carriers or telecommunications administrations for the specific purpose of providing
circuit-switched, packet-switched, and nonswitched-circuit services to the public. A user application
network is a configuration of data processing products (such as processing units or work stations)established and operated by users for the purpose of data processing or information exchange; such a
network may use transport services offered by common carriers or telecommunications
administrations. Network , as used in this publication, refers to a user application network.
Publications are not stocked at the address given below. Requests for IBM publications should bemade to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Products listed in thispublication may no longer be available.
A form for reader's comments is provided at the back of this publication. You may use this form tocommunicate your comments about this publication, its organization or subject matter with theunderstanding that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. If the form has been removed, address yourcomments to IBM Corporation, Department 28E, Internal Zip 5408, P.O. Box 1328, Boca Raton ,Florida 33429-1328.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1977, 1978, 1979, 1981, 1982, 1983, 1984,

1985, 1986, 1987

Contents

Contents
Chapter 1. Executive overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .... ...

1-1

Chapter 2. Series/1 architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .... . . . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . 3-1
4956 Processor (Model B10) .... ... . . . .... . .. ... .. . ... ..... ................. ... .. 3-24956 Processor (Model 61D) . . ............ .......... . ......... ......... . ..... . . . . 3-44956 Processor (Model E10) ................................. . ....... . ... . . .. .. .. 3-64956 Processor (Model E70) . .. .... ...... ... . . . .. . . . .................... ..... .... 3-84956 Processor (Models G10 and H10) .................. ... ............ ... ........ . 3-104956 Processor (Model JOO) ..................... . . . . ... .. ... ................ . ... 3-124956 Processor (Model KOO) ...... ..... . ................................ . ...... . 3-14
5170 System Unit (Model 496) ......... .. ........ .......... ........... . ...... . ... 3-16
Attachment features ...... . ... ..... ...... . ............... ... . .. ............... 3-18
Integrated Digital Input/Output Non-Isolated .. .. ... . ........ ..... . . ............. . 3-19
Timers ...... . ........ ... .... ..... ............................ .. .. . . .... . . 3-19
Teletypewriter Adapter . .. ........ ....... ..... .......... .............. . ..... . 3-19
GPIB Adapter ... .......... . . . .. . . .. ..................... .. . . .. ... ......... 3-19
Programmable Cycle-Stealing Digital Input/Digital Output Attachment ....... . ........ 3-19
Multifunction Attachment ... . ... . .... . ..... .. ................ ............... 3-20
Multidrop Work Station Attachment ............... .. . .. .... . .. .... .. . ...... . .. 3-21
Printer Attachment - 5200 Series ... . .. . ........................ . .............. 3-22
Configurations . .. ..... ..... .......... ......... ...... .. . .. . . ............. .. 3-22
Series/1-to-Personal Computer Channel Attachment .......... .. ..... . ... . .. . .. ... . 3-23
Communications features ........ _ . . _ ........ _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-24
Binary synchronous (BSC) features ......... . . ... . . ....... ....... . ..... ........ 3-27
Synchronous (SDLC) feature .. .. . . ... . ....... ......... ...... ... .............. 3-27
Asynchronous (ACC) features .................................. .. .. . ........ .-. 3-28
Feature-programmable multiline communications features .. . ....... ... ....... . ..... 3-28
Synchronous Communications Single-Line Control/High Speed ... .......... . ......... 3-29
Telephone Communications Controller and Adapter ................. ... ... ..... . . . 3-30
Other communications features ................... .... ............... ... .. . ... 3-31
Communications support features . ... ...... . ...... ... ..... . ...... . .. ... ........ 3-32
Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4959 Input/Output Expansion Unit .... . ............... . ..... ..... .. .. ...... .. ..... 4-24963 Disk Subsystem ..... .. ........................ .. ...... ................ . ... 4-44964 Diskette Unit ....... . .......................... ... ................ . .. . ... 4-64965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Modell) ..... ... ......................... ... . . 4-84965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Model 60D) ................. . .... . ...... . ..... 4-104965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Model EOO) .......... . ....................... . 4- 124967 High-Performance Disk Subsystem . ................................. ... .. . ... 4-14
4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape Unit ..... ..... . ... .. .. . .............. ... .. 4-16
Contents

111

Contents
4201 Proprinter ...... . . .. . ....... . ......... . . ...... .. . ... . .................. .
4202 Proprinter XL ...... . ..... ... ..... . ............ . ....... .. ....... . . ... ... .
4224 Printer .. ....... . ..................................................... .
4234 Printer4975 Printer5219 Prin ter
5224 Printer5225 Printer5262 Printer .. ... ................... .. .. .. .............. .. ................. .
3161 and 3163 ASCII Display Stations . ... . ........ . .. ....... ....... .. .... .. . .. . . . .
3162 ASCII Display Station ... . .... . ... . ............... . .. . ....... . ....... . . . .. .
3164 ASCII Color Display Station ..... . ......................................... .
4978 Display Station ......... . ..... . .... . .... . .... . . . ..... . .. . . ... . ... . ..... . .
5230 Data Collection Units . .......... . .. ... .. .. ... .. .... .. ........ . ......... . . .
4982 Sensor Input /Output U nit ... .. .... . . . ...... ... . . ........ . . . .. . ... . . . .. . . . . .
4987 Programmable Commu nications Subsystem .. ....... . .......... . .. ... .. . .. . . .. .
4993 Series/l - System/370 Termination Enclosure .. .. .......... . .. . ................ .
4997 Rack Enclosure ....... ... ..... . ......................................... .

4-18
4-20
4-22
4-24
4-26
4-28
4-30
4-32
4-34
4-36
4-38
4-40
4-42
4-44
4-46
4-50
4-54
4-56

Chapter 5. S eries /1 pr ogr amming s upport . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Series/l Event Driven Executive . .......... .... . . ..... . .. .. .. . ..... .... .. ....... . 5-2
Event Driven Executive - basic system functions ...................... ... ...... .... . 5-3
Basic Supervisor an d Emulator (5719-XS5) ... .... ..... . .... .. . . ....... . ... . .. . ... . 5-3
Even t Driven Execu tive for the Series/l System Unit (5719-XJ5) ...................... . 5-4
Event Driven Executive - program development .... . ....... . ....... .. . . ............. . 5-5
Program Preparation Facility (5719-XX6) .... . . . .... . ... . .. . ..... . . . .. .. .. .. . . ... . Q - Q
Macro Assembler (5719-ASA) . . ... . ....... .. .... . .......... . . . .. . . .... . .... . .. . 5-6
Macro Library (5719-LM9) .. . .. ....... . . ......... .. .. ... ... .. ... . .. . ..... ... . . 5-6
Host Preparation Facility (5799-BNA) ... ... ....... . . . . ...... . . . .. .. . .......... . . 5-7
Macro Library/Host (5740-LM6) . . . . . .......... .......... .......... .. . ........ . . 5-7
Tr ansaction Processing System (5719-TRl) ......... . ... ... . . ...... . ... . . .. .... ... . 5-8
Event Driven Executive - communications support .... . .... ... . . . ........ . . .. .. . . . .. . 5-9
Advanced Remote Job Entry (5719-RJl) ....... ...... . .. ... .. ..... ..... . .. . ... . .. . 5-9
Remote Manager (5719-RMl) .... . ... .. . . . .. . ............. . . . ....... . .. . ..... . 5-10
Communication Facility (5719-CF2) ......... . . . ...... . ...... . . .. . ... . . . ....... . 5-11
Systems Network Architecture Version 1 (5719-SXl) ..... . ................ ... . . ... . 5-12
System Network Architecture Version 2 (5719-XX9) ...... . ... . ... .......... ...... . . 5-12
Primary System Network Architecture (5719-XT4) ....... . .. . .. ........... .. . ... .. . 5-1 3
Network Definition Utility (5719-XT5) ..... . ............... . ......... . ......... . 5-14
X.25/HDLC Communications Support Program (5719-HD2) ......... . ......... .. .... . 5-15
Systems Network Architecture RJE Program (5719-SX2) ....... . . .. . ... ... .. . .. . ... . 5-15
Manufacturin g Automation Protocol Application Server (5719-XTl) .... . . . ........ .. . . 5-16
Event Driven Execu tive - device su pport ............................... . . .. . . .... . 5-17
System/370 Chan nel Attach Su pport (5719-CXl) . . .... .. .. ...... . .... .. . . .... . . . .. . 5-17
Event Driven Execu tive - commercial support .. . . . ....... . .. . . . .. ......... .. ... . .. . 5-18
Indexed Access Method (5719-AM4) ......................................... .. . 5-18
Sort/Merge (5719-SM2) ....... . .. . ..... . . . .......... . ....... . .. . .......... . . . 5-19
Event Driven Executive - application programmin g ................................ . 5-20
General P urpose Automation Executive-Distributive GPAX-D (5798-FAS) ... ... .. .... . . . 5-20
Store Item Receiving (5719-DSD) ...... . .. . ... . ... . .... . ......... . .. . . . . ..... . . 5-21
Series/l Store Item Management (5798-RTE) ........................... . ........ . 5-22
Plant Au tomation Commun ication System (5798-DRX) ... .. .......... . . .. . .... . ... . . 5-22
Chain Pharmacy System (5798-RGD) .. .. . . .. ............... ........... _ ... ... .. . 5-23

IV

IBM Series/1 Digest

Contents
Series/l Data Entry System (SIDES) (5796-ZDF) ..... . ..... ... . . .. .. ..... . .. .. ....
Series/l Realtime Programming System .... . .... . .. . . .. ..... . . . . .. . . ... . .. .. ......
Realtime Programming System - basic system functions . . .. . ... . . ....... .... . .. ... . . . .
Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7) . . . ... ... . .. .. .. . ...... . . ... .. ... . . ....
Realtime Programming System for Series/l System Unit (5719-PJ7) . ..... .. . . .. ... . ... .
Realtime Programming System - program development .... . . . . . ... . .. ..... . . . . . .. . .. .
Program Preparation Subsystem (5719-AS7) .. ..... . . . . .. . . ..... . . ........ . . .. .. ..
Job Stream Processor (5799-TEC) ... . . ... ........ ... .. . ..... . .. ........ ... . . . ..
Transaction Processing System (5719-TR6) . . .. .. . .... . ... . ...... . . ......... ..... .
Host Preparation Facility (5799-BNA) .... . .. . . .... .. .. . .... .. .. .. . .. .. . ........
Realtime Programming System - communications support .... . .. . . . . .. . ...... ..... .. . .
Remote Management Utility (5799-TEF) ..... .. ... . . .... . . . .... . . . ... ......... ...
Programmable Communications Subsystem Execution Support (5719-CS2) . . . ......... . .
Programmable Communications Subsystem Preparation Facility (5719-CSO) ..... ........
X.25/HDLC Communications Support Program (5719-HDl) ..... .... . . . ... . .. ....... .
Manufacturing Automation Protocol Communications Server (5719-XT2) ..... ........ . .
Advanced Remote Job Entry (5719-RJ6) . . .. . .. .. . ....... . . . ... ... ..... ..........
Realtime Programming System - device support . .. . ... ... .. . .. . . . .. . . . . .... ... .. ....
System/370 Channel Attach Support (5719-CAl) .. . .. ... . .. . . ....... . .. . . . .. . . .....
Realtime Programming System - commercial support .......... . .. ... .. . . . . .... . .. .. . .
Sort/Merge (5719-SMl) ... . ... . .... .... . ..... .. ....... . . .. ..... ...... . ..... ..
Realtime Programming System - application programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series/l Office Connect (5719-XT3) . .. . ..... ... . . . .. .... .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . . ... . .. ..
Series/l Data Entry System (SIDES) (5796-ZDE) . .. .. ..... .. .... .. . .. . ..... ...... .
Seri es/l communications - local area network support .. . .. .. . ... . ... . .. . . . . ..... .. .. .
Series/I-PC Connect (5719-CNl) . ... . ..... . .. . .. . . ... . . . . . . ...... .. .. . .. .. . . .. .
Series/l high-level language support . . ... ... ... .. .... .. .... . .. ... . .. . ..... . .... . .
High-level langua ge support - COBOL ..... .. . .. ... . .. ... ........ .. .. ... .. ....... .
COBOL for Event Driven Executive and Realtime Programming System . .... .. . . . ..... .
Host COBOL for the Series/l ........ . . ..... .. .......... . ..... ....... . .. .. .. ..
High-level language support - PL/I . . .... . ... . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .... . . .. .. .. . ... . ......
Series/l PL/I .... . . ... . . . . .. . .. ..... . . . ..... . .... . .. ... ... ......... .. .. ... .
High-level lan guage support - FORTRAN . ..... . .......... . .. . .. .. ... . . ........ . .. .
FORTRAN IV Compiler and Object Support Library (5719-F02) ........ . ... . ... .. . . . .
Mathematical and Functional Subroutine Library .. . ...... . . .. .... .. . .. . ... . ... ...
FORTRAN IV Realtime Subroutine Library (5719-F04) .. . . . . . .. .. ... . ... .. . .. . .... .
High-level language support - Pascal . ..... ... ........ . ...... .. ....... . .. .. . .... . .
Series/l Pascal . . .. . ...... . ... .. .. . .. .................... . .. .... . . .. .. .. . ..
Additional system support . . ... ... . . .... .. .. . . .... . . .. ... . . .. . . ... . .. ... . ......
Store Application Environment, Version 1, Releases 1, 2, and 3 (5719-YT7) .. . .. . .... . . . .
Series/l Interactive Executive (5719-UNl) . . ....... .. . .. ..... .. .. . .. . .. . ... ......
Series/l Input/Output Executive (5719-EMl) .. . ...... . .. . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . .. . . ... ..
Series/l Intelligent Work Station Version 2 (5799-TNG) . . . .. ..... ... .. . ... . .. ... ... .
Series/l program distribution, licensing, and support . .. . ..... . ... . ........... .. ......
Licensed Programs ..... .. ...... . ....... ..... ... ... . . ... ..... . . .. .. . .. . . . . ..
Field-Developed Programs/Installed User Programs . . .. ..... . .. . . . ......... .. ..... .
Programming RPQs ...... . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. ... .. ..... .. . ... . ... .... ..

5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-46
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-56
5-56

Chapter 6. Series/l support services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
IBM customer engineer support ....... . ....... . .... . ... . ............ . ..... . ..... . 6-2
Additional IBM customer services ... . .. . .... . . ..... ... .... . . .. ..... ..... .. ... . . . . 6-5
Series/l education . ... ..... .. . .. . .. ...... .. ......... .. .. . .. . ...... . ... . . ...... . 6-7
Series/l education - self-study courses . .. ... .... ... . . .... . . ... ... .. ... .. ...... . ... 6-10

Contents

VContents
Series/I education - classroom courses

6-11

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. X-I

VI

IBM Series/l Digest

1

Executive overview

Chapter 1. Executive overview
This publication presents a comprehensive view of the Series/1 computing
family, its programming, and support services.
This overview introduces you to the Series/1 features and functions, andsummarizes the information that is detailed in subsequent chapters.

Chapter 1. Executive overview

1-1

Executive overview
Introduction
The IBM Series/l is a family of low-cost, high-performance, small computers
widely known for their price/performance, configuration flexibility, andcommunications capabilities. These computers are designed to handle
general-purpose, commercial, and sensor-based applications in a
multiprogramming environment.
Series/l offers a modular approach to computing- an approach you cantailor to match your needs for equipment, programs, and services.
The Series/l hardware menu offers a variety of standard rack-mounted andfree-standing processing units, fixed and removable storage media, fast andefficient input/output attachments, plus attachment features that allow you
to attach a wide range of non-IBM terminals and equipment.
With its powerful architecture, Series/l can handle a variety of applications
efficiently and effectively. This architecture includes:•

An efficient cycle-steal channel for servicing input/output devices•

Microprocessor device control for reducing the channel burden for mostI/O units•

A comprehensive interrupt structure for high response and minimum
overhead•An extensive instruction set that provides flexibility for a variety of
applications.

Series/1 I/O architecture contains a system interface of high functional
content and integrity. Up to 256 individually addressable I/O devices (bothstandard and custom-built) may be attached to a Series/l system.
Series/l software offers an extensive choice of systems programs andproductivity tools. Programmers can select and implement only thosefunctions needed to meet their application needs.
You can choose from two primary full-function operating systems: theRealtime Programming System (RPS) or the Event Driven Executive (EDX).
In addition, Control Program support is available for those who wish todevelop applications with a tailored control program.

1-2

IBM Series/l Digest

Executive overview
A wealth of application programs from both IBM and non-IBM sources isavailable to address many of your specific operational requirements.
High-level languages can support diverse application requirements, such astransaction processing, commercial jobs, and sensor-based data handling.
Series/l hardware and software are available to meet a broad range ofrequirements for communications with host systems, other Series/l's,printers, and terminals (including the IBM Personal Computer). A numberof specific program tools are available for unique system requirements.

Whenever you acquire a Series/l computer, you gain an added valuedependable, efficient service when and as you need it.
This service capability rests on IBM's commitment to reliability,
availability, and serviceability. IBM service starts with the designer at thedrawing board, and includes strict quality control procedures in productdevelopment and manufacture, plus a variety of training and diagnostic
tools. In the event of a problem, skilled IBM Customer Engineer can
provide service around the clock from a nationwide network of service
support locations.

Chapter 1. Executive overview

1-3

Executive overview
Series/1 architecture
Series/I hardware and internal architecture have been designed to meet theperformance and reliability levels necessary for demanding realtime andsensor-based operations.
Bipolar LSP and CMOS5 logic circuitry are used extensively in the Series/I.
They consume little power and are fast, reliable, and compact. SAMOS2,
NMOS3, or MOSFET4 N-channel storage provides fast access and processing
power comparable to much larger computers.
The I6-bit processor architecture provides a comprehensive range of
instructions, multiple addressing modes, efficient use of storage and apowerful priority interrupt structure.
Series/I logic cards offer considerable flexibility in the choice of terminal
devices, and digital and analog connections to initiate and control activities
and processes. The attachment cards plug into the data channel, allowingease of change and servicing.

Large-scale integration.
Silicon aluminum metal·oxide semiconductor.
3N·channel metal-oxide silicon.
Metal-oxide semiconductor field-effect transistor.
Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor.

1-4

IBM Series/1 Digest

Executive overview
Series/1 proces sors and feature s
A choice of compatible processors, available in several models, allows fornondisruptive expansion of your computing facilities, and they are flexible
enough to accommodate your requirements now and in the future.
All processors have a basic operator console (the Series/1 System Units usea soft console via the keyboard), an optional programmer's panel. power
failure/restart, base power, four priority interrupt levels, and a powerful
instruction set. Using new technologies, the processor, storage. address
relocation translator function, and clock/comparator are combined on asingle processor card.
The 4956 processors are upward compatible with the 4954, withenhancements to support more demanding computing requirements.
Additional processor features include read-only storage protection andfloating-point (with 30 instructions and four 64-bit registers per level). The
4956 also provides single-bit correction and double-bit detection for storage
errors (ECC).
The processors offer a choice of storage size and attachment possibilities.
Standard processor storage is available from a minimum of 64 kilobytes (1kilobyte = 1024 bytes) to 2048 kilobytes. Processor average instruction tim es
range from approximately 7.4 microseconds to l.53 microseconds.
Processor selection depends on individual job requirements. For example.
the more powerful and internally faster 4956 processor might be used tohandle program development or complex operations when more than one
program is active, or for fast data transfer operations. A desk-top Series/1
System Unit, on the other hand, might be used for remote computer
installations in a distributed data processing environment, or where th eemphasis is on batch or single application use.
I/O devices are attached through I/O feature cards installed in theprocessor or optional I/O expansion unit. Up to 256 individual devices. bothstandard and custom-built, may be addressed by the Series/l. With th e
exception of printers, display stations, and System Units, all Series/1 units
fit into an IBM 4997 Rack Enclosure or EIA6 standard 19-inch rack.
An optional customer access panel provides quick-disconnect for a timer. ateletypewriter, and connectors for four integrated digital input/digital
output or customer direct program control features.

6

Electronics Industries Association.
Chapter 1. Executive overview

1-5

Executive overview
Series/l offers a choice of communication capabilities to allow wide
flexibility. Communication features are contained in feature cards thatplug into the processor data channel or the 4987- a programmablecommunications unit. Three line disciplines may be used- binary
synchronous communications (BSC), asynchronous communications control(ACC), and synchronous data link control (SDLC). In addition, ahigh-speed Local Communications Controller allows multiple Series/l's to
be attached on a ring in a peer-to-peer relationship.
SDLC and BSC communication can support sophisticated communications
links, including system-to-system and system-to-host-computer, with theSeries/l acting as a terminal or device network controller. BSC single line
also allows the user to perform an initial program load (IPL) of the Series/lfrom a remote host. ASCII communication is supported for connection of
inexpensive terminals like the IBM 3161 or 3163 ASCII Display Stations.
Ring-connected processors offer the basis for a variety of applications
including distribution of functions and sharing of data among autonomous
applications.
These communication capabilities can be used independently or
simultaneously to enable the user to choose the processors, connection
method, and devices best suited to a particular application.

Series/1 I/O and system support units
Series/l I/O devices include disk and diskette units, magnetic tape units,line and matrix printers, and display stations. Many of the attachment
features for these devices are equipped with cycle-stealing microprocessor
controllers that permit device overlapping and reduce processor workload.
The versatility of your 4956 configuration may be expanded through I/Ofeature locations in the 4959 Input/Output Expansion Unit and/or the 4965
Storage and I/O Expansion Unit. (The Series/l System Units containintegrated disks and diskettes.)
Two types of direct access storage are available with Series/l: high-speed,large-capacity, fixed-disk storage and inexpensive, removable-diskettestorage.
The 4963 Disk Subsystem and the 4967 High Performance Disk Subsystem
offer storage capacity ranging from 58 million bytes up to 358 million bytes
per unit. A cache feature offers the potential of significant disk throughput
improvement. Cache is standard on the 4967, 4965 Model EOO, and 4956
Models GlO, HlO, and JOO; it is optional on the integrated disks of the 4965
Model 60D and 4956 Models 3lD, 6lD, and E70. A cache function isprovided by the software for the Series/l System Units.

1-6

IBM Series/l Digest

Executive overview
With the 4964 Diskette Unit and the 4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit,
you have an easily usable and flexible means of storing and distributing
data and programs.
The 4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape Unit is a high-performance,large-capacity, full-function streaming magnetic tape unit. The 4968
provides for fast, convenient save/restore of data on medium-to-Iarge disks.
A 200-megabyte disk can be saved on three reels of tape in approximately 30
minutes. The autoload function makes tape handling easy even for an
inexperienced operator.
The 5225 and 5262 printers are line-impact printers that are especiallysuited for heavy duty printing requirements, such as the production oflengthy report listings, daily work status printouts, and batch listings ofdaily transactions.
The 4224, 4975, and 5224 are tabletop matrix printers capable of producing
high-quality printouts and accepting multipart paper. The 4224 and 4975
offer an option of printing correspondence-quality output including
proportional spacing. You can define the character sets you need forparticular jobs. Typical uses might include printed reports on the status ofan operation, messages from a remote terminal, invoices, packing lists, andletters.
The 5219 is a tabletop serial-impact printer that provides letter-quality
printing, extensive type-style selection, and a choice of continuous forms or
cut-sheet paper feeding.
The 4201 Proprinter and the 4202 Proprinter XL are available for use with
the Series/1 System Unit. In addition, they can be used as low-cost systemprinters for the Event Driven Executive Operating System.
Display station options underline the versatility of Series/I. The 316X
ASCII Display Stations provide low-cost ASCII devices suitable for many
applications requiring local or remote terminals. Custom graphics and achoice of keyboards distinguish the 4978 Display Station. All are tabletop
units , accommodating a maximum of 1920 characters on the display screen.
The 5230 Data Collection units record data, which can vary from time
recording to a comprehensive system for cost and work status accounting.
With the 4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit, Series/1 can control a wide rangeof sensor-based or event-driven applications, such as machine status
reporting or alarm/contact sensing (digital signal), and temperature andvoltage measurements (analog signal).

Chapter 1. Executive overview

1-7

Executive overview
The 4987 Programmable Communications Subsystem provides power andcontrol facilities for expanded communications versatility in the Series/I.
The subsystem has the capacity for multiple line disciplines in a single
communications unit and can provide a cost alternative for the user oflarge numbers of communications lines.
The 4993 Series/I-System/370 Termination Enclosure and its companion
channel attachment feature allow a Series/I to be channel-attached to IBM
System/370 for high-speed data transfer. The Series/I-to-Personal Computer
Channel Attachment feature allows Series/I to be an effective gateway andserver system in an IBM Personal Computer network. Series/I modular
units may be mounted in the IBM 4997 Rack Enclosure or EIA standard
I9-inch rack. IBM offers four models of rack enclosures, in two sizes, witheither plain or decorative filler covers. A primary power-distribution
system is included.
Until now, we've looked only at hardware-its power, modularity, andsophistication. But Series/I hardware is complemented by programming
support and high-level languages that emphasize efficient and productive
use of your Series/I.

IBM Series/1 programming support
Programming that offers a wide range of support is available for theSeries/I:

1-8

IBM Series/l Digest•

Operating systems that support batch, transaction driven,communications, and realtime applications•

Programs for preparing application programs to execute under control
of an IBM operating system or under a specialized operating system•

BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, Pascal, and PL/I high-level language
support•Modules that provide I/O device support and other supervisory control
functions for building an operating system and applications•

Programming packages for such needs as energy management,
intelligent data entry, and text entry.

Executive overview
IBM Series/1 support services
The IBM commitment to your equipment and programming does not end
with a parts and labor warranty- it is just beginning.
You can choose one of several maintenance plans, matching your selection
to your requirements and your budget.
Skilled IBM customer service representatives are backed by a country-wideparts distribution network that locates the nearest parts and gets them toyou quickly. Customer engineers are equipped with a variety of portablediagnostic tools to h elp pinpoint faults rapidly. Programming support
advice and assistance in development and writing of tailored operating
systems and application programs are provided, as available under asystems engineering contract. IBM education and training courses areavailable if you need them, to help you get the most from your Series/1 withthe least delay. There are courses for different levels of personnel,
including systems support, programming, and operation staff. A range oftraining courses includes classroom teaching and self-study, a method bywhich a student works at his or her own pace.
Series/1 is a "mix and match" system. You determine the modules your equire - equipment, programming, and service. The combinations arepractically unlimited.

Note: Additional information about the Series/1 product line is in the IBM
Series/l Pocket Digest, GX34-0104. The Pocket Digest contains the Series/1
prices and examples of Series/1 configurations, which were formerly
publish ed in this Digest.

Chapter 1. Executive overview

1-9Executive overview

1-10

IBM Series/1 Digest

2

Series/1 architectureChapter 2. Series/1 architecture
The I6-bit processor architecture of the Series/I provides a comprehensive
range of instructions, multiple addressing modes, efficient use of storage,
and a powerful priority interrupt structure.
With the Series/I, you have considerable flexibility in systems building,because the architecture is open-ended and not tied to any particular task,job, or device.
And the structural and logical stability enables you to adapt a system moreeasily to your changing requirements.
Note: The architecture of the Series/I System Unit is similar to thearchitecture of the 4956, although there are minor differences. This chapter
refers to the 4956 architecture.

Chapter 2. Series/l architecture

2-1Series/1 architectureHigh reliability is designed into the Series/lthrough the use of proven technology such as
bipolar LSI technology in the processor and
MOSFET, SAMOS, and NMOS logic in mainstorage.

The Series/l architecture supports either small
or complex systems requirements. A modular
computing system, it is a flexible base on which
to build your system and achieve:••

High performance and rich function at an
attr ac tive price

Suitable for applications ranging fromconventional data processing to sensor-based
applications like energy management, theSeries/l is a comprehensive computer- meetingthe needs of installations requiring either asingle computer or multiple small computers.

A high standard of reliability andserviceability through the use of proventechnology.

System design overview

To achieve this flexibility, the Series/l design ismodular and compact- most units fit into an
IBM 4997 Rack Enclosure or an EIA standard
19-inch rack. Series/l components occupy
either the full width or a half width in a rack
enclosure. And if a system requires space formodular units beyond the capacity of a single
rack, multiple racks can be bolted together toform a multibay enclosure. Included in an IBM
4997 Rack Enclosure is a primary power panel
for distributing ac power to the individual units
installed in the enclosure.

The Series/l offers a variety of data processing
I/O devices and attachment capabilities that
include:•Sensor I/O equipment•

Comm unication lines•

Customer devices.

111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

/ ..
!"'

1:-

""

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111-

1111111111111111111111111111111/
2-2

IBM Series/ l Di gestSeries/1 architecture
Another option available is a stand-alone unit.
Instead of being rack-mounted, the 4956
processors with integrated disk units can behoused in a tabletop Stand-Alone Enclosure(feature number 4520 or 4521).

Expanding the capability of the Series/1 arevarious input/output devices and attachment
features . Attachment feature cards allow
attachment of:•

For greater flexibility, individual I/O
attachment features , processor features , andsome storage additions are constructed on
multilayer printed-circuit cards. These circuit
cards can be selectively plugged into sockets on
the back panel of certain modular units. By
selecting the desired units, and functions, you
can tailor a system to your needs.
The processor unit contains the processor card,
data channel, processor storage, basic console,a power supply, and card sockets for plugging
in processor features, storage additions, and I /O
attachment feature cards. When greater I/O
capacity is needed, I/O expansion units areavailable. These units contain both a power
supply and card sockets for additional datachan nel feature cards, and some models include
additional disk and diskette capacity.

Data processing I/O devices•

Communications lines•

User I/O devices and instruments•

Sensor I/O units.

I/O attachment feature cards and integrated
communications feature cards plug into theprocessor or input/output expansion unit.
Attachment features are not necessarily limited
to a single function. Some features offer
multiple attachment combinations. A
programmable communications subsystem also
provides for attachment of communications
features. Sensor I/O feature cards plug into thesensor I/O unit. In this way, individual devices
are attached to the processor and main storage
via the data channel, with the channel
directing the flow of information.
The following figures are block diagrams of aSeries/1 system:

Ser ies / 1 System Unit

Processor
Terminaldata
hostchanneladapter....

Optional
terminal
hostadapter...

Communication
features...

...

Printer
attachment'--

Chapter 2. Series/1 architecture

2-3Series/1 architecture

Series/ l processoro•Processor datachannel
Ser ies/ l rack mounted units
Multifunction
attachment
featureCommunications
attachment
features

Programmablecommunications
controller feature

Series/ l-System 370
channel attachment

Sensor I/ O
attachment
featureo1111==============::::.1

1111111 111111111111111111111111111111111

o1,-----....,........

o1111111 1111111111111111

Series / l -to-PC
channel
attachmentoChann elrepower
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIHI IIIIIIIIIIII

Additional
data channel
features

2-4

IBM Series/ l Digest

System / 370

Series/1 architecture
Processor structure
Main storage
Main storage holds the data and instructions
for applications to be processed on the Series/I.
The basic unit of information is the byte (eightbinary data bits plus an associated parity bit).
The 4956 has error checking and correcting
storage; single-bit errors are corrected, anddouble-bit errors are detected.
On other processors, odd parity by byte ismaintained throughout storage. On reads fromstorage, an even parity causes a machine checkerror. The Series/l instruction set addresses
bytes either separately or grouped together.
Instructions can refer to bits, bytes, byte
strings, words , or doublewords as data operands
to allow efficient, flexible use of storage.

Addressing main storage: Each byte locationin main storage is directly addressable. Byte
locations in storage are numberedconsecutively, starting with location 0; eachnumber is considered to be the address of thecorresponding byte. Storage addresses are
16-bit unsigned binary numbers, which give a
direct addressing range of 0 to 65,535 bytes.
The storage address relocation translator
function is required to address storage above
65,536 bytes. With the translator function, a
portion of the I6-bit address and an address key
are used as a logical address to generate either
a 19-bit, 20-bit, or 2I-bit physical address.
Storage protection: When the translator isenabled, a read-only bit can be assigned to any
given block of storage. This protection is fromany problem state program. Supervisor state
can write to any location in storage.
Storage mapping: In a multiprogramming
system the storage address relocation translator
function can provide the means to assign
se parate storage pages to individual programsand data and to prevent unauthorized access tothis storage. Data or program sharing among
separate tasks can also be accommodated, using
th e facilities of the translator. For example,
users can share reentrant code or establish

intertask communications. This allows thetranslator to support a flexible
multiprogramming environment, whileproviding safeguards to prevent accidental or
intentional destruction of application or system
programs.
The relocation translator function permits
addressing main storage locations beyond 64
kilobytes (KB) and facilitates dynamic storage
relocation on a 2KB-block basis. When thetranslator function is enabled, the read-onlyprotection is under control of the translator.
Using the translator function, tasks on each of
the four Series/l priority levels can address
three separate storage maps through threeaddress keys. For each priority level, one ofthese keys can be used to address a map for
fetching instructions, a second key can be used
to address a map for all data not defined by the
first key, and a third key can address a map forsource operands in storage-to-storage
operations. In addition, each I/O device has anaddress key used in cycle-stealing operations
that enables the user to directly assign astorage map to a given I/O device.
The three address keys point to stacks ofhardware translator segmentation registers. On
the 4956, eight stacks of segmentation registers
are provided (16 on the 4956 E, H, J , and K
models), each stack containing 32 segmentation
registers, for a total of 256 and 512. Each ofthese segmentation registers defines a 2KB
segment of storage. Once loaded, each stack ofsegmentation registers can contain a complete
map of up to 64KB scattered in 2KB physicalsegments. Privileged supervisor instructions
set or change the address space keys and thecontents of the segmentation registers.
This arrangement allows programs to be
scattered throughout storage. It also allows
users to access common data or programs byloading more than one segmentation registerwith the same 2KB segment address. In a
multitasking environment, the existence of aseparate stack of segmentation registers foreach address key value removes the need tosave and restore the storage map and allows
fast task switching.

Chapter 2. Series/l architecture

2-5Series/1 architecture
The 4956 E, H, J, and K models also have eightstacks of I /O segmentation registers.

Instruction set
The Series/1 family of processors has microcodethat permits a rich instruction set of up to 182
individual instructions. Additionally, 30
floating-point instructions are available withthe optional floating-point feature of the 4956
Processors (a reduced speed version is standard
on the Series/1 System Units). Series/1
instructions operate on bit, byte, word,
doubleword, and variable field-length byte
operands. Many of the instructions operate inmultiple operand types.

Instruction formats: Series/1 instruction
formats allow the following types of address
arguments, operand locations, and data types.
These formats are intended to show function
only and not assembler coding.
Address arguments:
R

The effective address is the register
R.
(R)
The effective address is the contentsof the register R.
(R)+
The effective address is the contentsof the register R. After an
instruction uses it, the contents of
the register are increased by the
number of bytes addressed by the
instruction.
A
An address value.
A+(R)The effective address is the contentsof the register R added to the addressA.
(R)*
The effective address is the contentsof storage at the address defined by
the contents of register R.
(A + (R»* The effective address is the contentsof storage at the address defined by
the contents of register R added tothe address A.
A*
The effective address is the contentsof storage at the address defined byA.
D + (R)* The effective address is the contentsof storage at the address defined by
the contents of R added to the valueof the displacement D.

2-6

IBM Series/1 Digest(D + (R»* The effective address is the contentsof storage at the address obtained byadding the contents of R to the valueof the displacement D.
D2 + (Dl The effective address is calculated+ (R»* as follows: the contents of theregister R are added to the value ofthe displacement D1 to form an
address. The contents of that storage
location are added to the value of D2
to form the effective address.

Operand locations:Register-immediate (R-I)
Storage-immediate (S-I)
Register-register (R-R)
Storage-register (S-R)
Register-storage (R-S)
Storage-storage (S-S).

Data types:
Bit
Byte
Byte field
Word
Doubleword

Function examples:
Move
Add
Subtract
Multiply
DivideTest
CompareAND
OR
Exclusive OR
Most instructions in their basic format are one
word; expanded address modes use two or threewords, as required. Series/1 instructions use 11
possible combinations of addressing modes; amaximum of four can be implemented for any
one instruction.
The instruction set offers the programmer awide choice of powerful instructions. For
example, with variable field length instructions,

Series/1 architecture
up to 64KB of storage can be moved with one
instruction.

Supervisor state: Series/l instructions are
executed in either supervisor state or problem
state. This facility gives the Series/l user
anoth er built-in feature to protect criticalsystem functions. For example, privileged orsupervisor state instructions are those that
control input/output, interrupt level processing,storage protection, address space management,a nd other system resources and functions. Only
when the processor enters the supervisor state
as a r esult of an interrupt or immediately after
initial program load can these sensitive types of
instructions be run.
R egisters: Series/l has eight general-purpose
registers for each of the four priority interrupt
levels. These registers have no predefined orpreassigned function and can be assigned
dyn amically by the programmer : Anyge neral-purpose r egister can be used as anaccumul a tor, index pointer, or index register.
In addition, the optional floating-point feature
has fo ur registers.
S tacking: The Series/l stacking mechanism
provides two types of stacking facilities- data
stacki n g a nd linkage stacking. There is norestriction , except storage size, on the numberof stacks the programmer can define. Aninterrupt condition sign a ls a full or an empty
stack , protecting the programmer against errors
in ma n aging stacks.

The data stacking facility provides an efficientand simple way to handle last-in/first-out stacks
of data items, and/or parameters in mainstorage. The data items, or parameters, arestack elements. For a given queue or stack,each element is one, two, or four bytes wide.
Instructions for each element size- byte, word,or doubleword- are provided to push an element
into a stack (register to storage) and pop anelement from a stack (storage to register).

Linkage stacking provides an easy method forlinking subroutines to a calling program. A
stack one word wide, is used for saving andrestoring the status of general registers and forallocating dynamic work areas. The StoreMultiple instruction stores the contents of theregisters into the stack and reserves adesignated number of bytes in the stack as awork area. The Load Multiple and Branch
instruction reloads the registers, releases thestack element, and causes a branch back to thecalling program.
Instruction set summary: For arithmetic
operations the Series/l includes hardware
multiply/divide with byte, word, or doubleword
operations. The floating-point feature (optionalon the 4956), includes separate instructions toperform single-precision (32 bit) anddouble-precision (64-bit) operations. A summary
at the end of this section highlights thecompleteness of the Series/l instruction set,
which provides the programming flexibility
usually found only in larger systems.

Registers one and seven have s pecial usages with certain instructions; con sult the IBM Series/l
Principles of Operation , GA34-0152.
Chapter 2. Series/1 architecture

2-7Series/1 architecture
Instruction set
Operand types
Number of
instructions

Function

Byte

1-5

I-R

I-R

I

Word

I

Word

R-R

I

S-R/ R -S
Byte

X
X

X
X
X'

X
X
X,

X,

X'

X
X

X
X

X

X

Add

X

X
X

Subtrac t

X
XMultipl y

D ivid e

A dd w / carry
Subtract w /ca rr y
Add carry
Subtrac t carry

Byte

I

Word

I

Doubl eword

X

Test un der mask

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

Complement

AND
Move
L oad

X
X
X,
X,

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X'

X,

X'

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X'

X'

X,

X

X

X

X

X
X

Load and zeroIn terchange
Push /po p

X

Variable -field
length
X2
X2
X2

Move
Compare equal
Compare not equ al

I

18

Shift

I Singleword

X
X

Left circu lar

Left logical
R ight logica l
R ight arithmetic
L eft logica l-co unt

System data

23

X
X

I

Computed

I Double-I Single-

Set

word

X
X
X
X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

I

Copy

X
X

Segm e nt regi sters

Storag e key
Level statu s bloc k

I n process flag s
PSW
Address k ey
Con sole data light s
Con sole data buff er
Cloc kCompara tor

only .

2 R -S only.

IBM Series/1 Digest

X
X

X

1

D ouble - I
word

word

R -R

Current levelI ndicators
Mask

X
X

X
X

Store
Load add ress

3

X
X

X
X
X
X

R eset b its (NAN D.!
Set b it s (OR I
X OR

Compare

2-8

Word

5-5
Doubl eword

Arithme tic,
logical,data move

99

1 S-R

I

Word

I

I

R -S
Set

I

Copy

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X

I

Series/1 architecture
Instruction set (continued)

Number of
instruct ion s

4Function

Bit manipulation
Test
Test and set
Test and reset
T est and invert

2

Multiple register
Load multiple andbranchStore multipl e

7

ControlSupervisor call
L evel exit
EnableDISableStop
DiagnoseInterchange operand
keys

1

I/O
Operate 1/0

15

Branch/jump
Branch /ju mp unconditional
Branch/ju mp and link
Branch and link short
Branch / jump on Inot} condition
Branch on Inot} condition code
Branch on Inot} overflow
Branch indexed short
Jump on count
Address resolution with indi rect branch

30

Floating·poin t
Load
Store
Add
Subtract
Multiply

Single·precision
132·bit}X

Double·pr ecision

164 ·b it }
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DivideAdd register
Subtract reg ister
Multiply register
D ivide reg ister
Move register
Compare register
L oad integer'

X

X

Store i n te ger 'Load level block
Store level block

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

' S i ng le·precision is 1 6 bits.
Do uble-precision is 32 bits.

Chapter 2. Series/1 architecture

2-9Series/1 architectureInterrupt structure

Efficient operation of a processor depends on
prompt response to both internal and external
events. Series/1 recognizes two general types ofinterrupts, those from external
events- input/output interrupts- and those frominternal events-class interrupts.

Priority interrupts: Series/1 architecture allows
16 preemptive priority interrupt levels.
However, four priority interrupt levels areprovided on the Series/1 processors. Associatedwith each level is a bank of hardware registers(16 bits each), an instruction address register,an address key register, and a level statusr egister that includes a set of result indicators.
This is the level status block. If floating-point
is installed, there are also four 64-bit
floating-point registers per level.
Wh en switching between levels occurs, theinformation contained in the " interrupted-from"
hardware level status block is automaticallypreserved; as a result, it is not necessary tostore the status indicators and general-purposer egisters in main storage. Automatic vectoring
to the service routine for a given device isaccomplished by the eight-bit device addresses,
providing 256 direct interrupt entry points.
No program polling of devices is required toaccept the interrupt or identify the device.
Assignment of a given device to an interrupt
level is under program control and can be
dynamically reassigned in response to system
conditions. Masking and acceptance of priority
interrupts by the processor are under program
control on the basis of all four levels, one ormore individual levels, or one or moreindividua l devices.
The Series/1 interrupt structure, with its
se parate register stacks and unique
double-vectored interrupt addressing, greatly
facilitates efficient interrupt handling. The
preemptive interrupt structure, and particularlyth e r eplication of registers on a per-level basis,
is a significant asset in applications requiring
multitask structures.

2-10

IBM Series/l Digest

Class interrupts: Class interrupts provide ameans of alerting the system to the occurrenceof certain classes of errors or exception
conditions. Class interrupts may occur on anyof the four priority interrupt levels; the classinterrupts preempt operation of the system on
the appropriate priority level until the classinterrupt condition has been reset.
There are eight types of class interrupts:•

Machine check• Program check• Power/thermal warning• Supervisor call
• Soft exception trap
• Trace• Console• Clock.
Only the power/thermal warning, console, andthe clock class interrupts can be disabled underprogram control. Identification and status
information about the exception or error isprovided in the processor status word. With
this information, the program may be able torecover in a manner that allows normal
processing to continue with minimum
disruption.
The trace class interrupt provides aninstruction trace mechanism to ease program
debugging. Instruction tracing may occur on
any priority interrupt level. When trace isturned on, a unique class interrupt occurs prior
to each instruction. Upon exit from the traceroutine , the next instruction is run and theprocess repeats until the trace is turned off.
Special supervisor state instructions areavailable to control interrupt processing.

Series/1 architecture
Data channel
Series/1 provides a data channel interface forall input/output devices; up to 256 devices canbe addressed.
The data channel is asynchronous andmultidropped, allowing the attachment ofdevices with various speeds and technologies.
All Series/1 data channel signal lines are TTL(transistor· transistor logic) level compatible.
The processor data channel supports direct
program control operations, cycle-steal
operations, and interrupt servicing.

Direct program control operations: Direct
program control input/output operations
involve a separate I/O command from theprocessor for each data item transferred acrossthe channel. The data can consist of one byteor one word. The operation might or might notterminate in an interrupt. Direct program
control is an easy way to transfer data. It also
allows the programmer to maintain datatransfer in line with the program, for example,
for conversational or slower speed operations.
Cycle·steal operations: Cycle-stealing, incontrast to direct program control, once
initiated, involves no interaction on the part ofthe processor during the transfer of a block of
information between main storage and a device.
During a cycle-steal operation, the data channel
and the I/O device handle many of the functions
performed by the processor during a direct
program-controlled operation. An Operate I/O
instruction can initiate cycle-stealing datatransfers of up to 65,535 bytes between mainstorage and a device. Cycle-steal operations areoverlapped with processing operations. Word
or byte transfers, command and data chaining,
burst mode, and program-controlled interrupts
can be supported. All cycle-steal operations
terminate with an interrupt.
Burst mode involves the dedication of thechannel for the entire time of the data transfer.
In this case, all other devices are locked out of
the channel,

permitting high-speed data transfer at the
maximum rate the main storage and thechannel can accommodate.
Command chaining allows the programmer tosequence an I/O device through a set ofoperations. A processor interrupt occurs after
the successful execution of the last operation or
on an exception condition.
Cycle-steal devices include the disk, diskette,
magnetic tape, display stations or terminals,
printers, communications features andsubsystem, System/370 channel attachment
feature , and Series/1-to-Personal Computer
channel attachment feature .

Interrupt servicing: Interrupt requests from thedevices, along with cycle-steal requests , arepresented and polled on the interface
concurrently with data transfers.
The initial program load interrupt from aprocessor device or a binary synchronous
communications line from a remote hostcomputer is also supported.
The channel provides comprehensive error
checking, including time-outs, sequence
checking, and parity checking. It consists ofthe following major line groups:•

Address bus - A bidirectional bus used for
device selection and for passing commands
to devices during Operate I/O instructions.
The address bus is also used for passing
main storage addresses from the devices tothe channel during cycle-steal datatransfers.

•

Data bus - A bidirectional bus used for
passing data and control information to orfrom devices during Operate I/O
instructions. The data bus is also used for
passing device addresses and an interrupt
information byte to the processor during
interrupt acceptance.

•

Control lines - Unidirectional lines andbuses used for (1) interrupt and cycle-steal
requests, (2) condition code and status
reporting, (3) resets, and (4) basic control ofsequences.

Chapter 2. Series/1 architecture

2-11Series/1 architecture
In the Series/I , the data channel acts in a
primary-secondary relationship with attached
I/O devices; the data channel is always theprimary. This significant characteristic gives
the Series/I positive control during I/O
operations. The data channel verifies device
attachment and the status of the device relative
to the channel function to be performed. It
ensures that the addressed device is installed
and is capable of processing a command. The
channel validates the device command andinitiates the data transfer.

During data transfer, the channel checks data
parity, both incoming and outgoing. Storage
protection (if applicable), address translation (ifapplicable), and address validity checking arealso operative during data transfer.
The parallel operation of the address bu s, thedata bus, and control lines allows pollingconcurrent with data transfer.

IBM 4956 Processor
R elocationtranslator
function

Storage

Processor

Chann el

I
K

----

asic console_I
Pr og ramme r conso l e

II

I

I

Optional
f loat i ng
point

I/ O
attac hment
featureChann elrepowerfeatureII

I / O device

IBM 4959 I/ O Expansion Unit
,/

II

I I

I

Channelrepo we r
featureI/ O
attac hment
f eat ure

I/ O
attachment
feature

I

~

.,

I

I/ O dev ice

I/ O device

To additional I/ O
expans i on units

2-12

I

I

IBM Seri es/ I Di gest

4956
Processor witha 4959Input/ Output
Expansion Unit

Series/1 architecture
Series/1 reliability, availability, andserviceability
Reliability, availability, and serviceability(RAS) are primary design objectives of IBM
products and are part of the IBM development
cycle from the earliest stages of productdevelopment. In the Series/I , IBM has usedproven technology with known performance andserviceabili ty characteristics.
In addition to using state-of-the-art technology,
extensive ch ecking circuits and microcode arebuilt into the system to detect machine
malfunctions. Microprocessors are employed in
the processor and in each cycle-steal I/Oa dapter , except the 4962 disk attachment andt he Sys tem 370 channel attachment. These
small, stored program processors not only
provide th e logical control and coordination
between the device and the processor but also
provide a diagnostic capability to the system.
Microdiagnostic routines have been built intoth e microprocessors to check the operational
integrity of th e processor, channel, and I/Oadapter s tha t contain the microprocessors.
The microdiagnostic routines operate
autom atically when the system is powered on.
Various tests are activated, depending on which
ac tion invoked the test.

4.

Validate the integrity of the data channel.

If an error is detected in the processor or datachannel, the operator is alerted before an
attempt is made to use the system. If a problem
is detected in an I /O attachment feature , anerror condition is presented to the user the firsttime the device is addressed.

Provided connections between modules passthis self-diagnostic test, the system link to IPL(initial program load) takes place.
Self-diagnosis then passes from the hardware
level to the program level where the operating
system may monitor operations, detect errors
and retry the operation, and log all detected
errors to disk or diskette for later examination
by maintenance personnel.
During system operation, an importantreliability consideration is the integrity of data
within the system. Parity checking of storage
and channel, addressing-boundary restrictions,storage protection and a privileged instruction
set help to ensure accurate processing of data.
In addition, the Series/I utilizes error checking
and correcting storage (corrects all single-bit
errors and detects all double-bit errors) on the4956. If system errors or exception conditions
do occur, a class interrupt could result.

The mi crodiagnostic routines:
1.

2.

3.

Validate integrity of processor data flow.
Write in a nd then read back a specified bit
pattern in a ll of main storage.
Note: The Realtime Programming System's(RPS) bootstrap loader validates theintegrity of all installed primary storage (upto 64KB). Those versions of RPS that
support storage above 64KB verify thepresence of the storage address relocation
tran slator function and validate secondary
stora ge integrity (above 64KB).
Validate the integrity of the device
controller by running through all the
microinstruction s in the microcontroller
a nd then comparing an accumulated checkdigit to a pre-programmed check digit.

Chapter 2. Series/1 architecture

2-13Series/1 architecture
The 4956 processors contain an error log thatprovides a history of the 64 most current errorsthat have occurred since the power was
switched on. This information is available tothe customer engineer through theprogrammer's console or the Diagnose
instruction and is useful in isolating the causeof a particular problem. At power-on, all 64
entries in the error log are cleared.
At the input/output level of the system, IBM
has incorporated capabilities into theattachment features and into the devices
themselves to help ensure reliability of the
hardware and the data. The following are
examples of checks that are built into theattachment features:•

Condition codes - Each time an Operate
I/O instruction is issued, the device,controller, or channel immediately reports
to the processor a condition code pertaining
to processing of the I/O command.

Redundancy checking - Vertical
redundancy checking (VRC), longitudinal
redundancy checking (LRC), and cyclic
redundancy checking (CRC), as applicable,
are done by the various I/O adapters. For
example, the disk and diskette units bothgenerate CRC characters by sector for boththe sector ID fields and data fields.
The ACC control features provide LRC and
VRC checking on receive data- the BSC
features offer CRC with EBCDIC and
LRC/VRC with ASCII. The 4987
Programmable Communications Subsystem
can provide VRC, LRC, or CRC.

The Series/! processors contain circu itry toprovide continuous power verification (that is,circuitry to monitor the source voltage and theoutput voltage of the power supply).

Interrupt status byte (ISB) - If an error
condition exists after an I/O operation (forexample, a channel parity check), detailed
information on the nature of the error ispresented in the ISB.

If the source voltage drops, a power/thermal
warning class interrupt occurs, and if thevoltage drops below a certain point(approximately 80 Vac or 160 Vac), the systemshuts off. Upon restoration of the mainline
voltage, the system automatically switches
power back on and, if the IPL switch is set toauto-IPL, the system automatically performs
another IPL. The IPL bootstrap program canbe coded to reload a selected program andprocessing resumes. This automatic restartfeature makes the system particularly viable foruse in a remote or unattended location.

Further residual parameters from the device
are also available in the device statuswords, which can be brought into storage by
doing a Start Cycle Steal Status operation.

If the error occurs as a result of a failure in the
power supply or its load, or as a result of athermal condition, the system shuts off andremains off until it is manually restored.

On devices that present interrupts,
condition codes are again presented with
the I/O interrupt to further define the exact
status of the I/O operation.
•

•

2-14

IBM Series/1 Digest

3

Series/1 processors and features

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features
Series/1 offers many compatible processors- the 4956 processors and theentry-level desk-top Series/1 System Units, which are available in several
models. The processors differ mainly in storage size and speed, with the4956 J and K models offering 2 megabytes of onboard storage and thegreatest internal speed. Processor models also differ in the number of I/Ofeatures that may be attached.
Features that enhance reliability and performance include power faildetect/auto restart, storage protection for complex application
environments and program development, error checking and correcting
storage, and optional floating-point feature for mathematical and scientificcalculations.
Adding one or more 4959 Input/Output Expansion Units or 4965 Storage andInput/Output Expansion Units to your 4956 provides I/O attachment
capacity beyond that in the Series/1 processor.
Attachment features provide a wide range of device and system attachment
to the Series/l. Specifically covered in this chapter are features for
attaching 5200 Series printers, multiple work stations, and non-IBM
devices. The Multifunction Attachment and various communications
features are also covered.
Note: Programming support refers to the latest version and release levelthat was announced at the time this document was printed. Programming
support is available under separate license.

Chapter 3. Series/ l processors and features

3-1

4956 Processor specifications (Model BIO)
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Storage cycle time
550 nanoseconds
Average instruction
time (weighted)
2.3 microseconds
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 400 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.42 megabytes per
second115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

6.0 amperes
5.8 amperes
3.3 amperes
3.0 amperes
2.9 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.70
1
15 amperes

Physical characteristics
Programming support
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
476 millimeters (18.75 in.)22.7 kg (50 lb)
42.2 kg (93 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
500 watts (2157 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%3-2

IBM Series/1 Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
None required.

4956 Processor (Model BIO)
Standard featu re s

Optional features

•
•
•

•

Floating-point (feature 3925) - Both singleand double-precision arithmetics areavailable using 30 additional instructions
and four 64-bit registers per priority
interrupt level. It does not use a feature
location and can be field-installed.

•

Programmer Console (feature 5655) Provides indicators and controls for
operator-oriented systems where programs
are tested or entered and r un.

•

Storage Addition (feature 6330) - Provides
additional processor storage in 256KB
increments (Model B only, maximu m ofthree).

•

Storage Addition (feature 6331) - Provides
an additional 512KB of processor storage(Model B only, maximum of one).

•

Basic Storage Expansion (feature 6332) Provides 512KB of base main storage
instead of 256KB. It does not require afeature location and is not field-installable(Model B only, maximum of one).

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

High-performance Series/I processor
1024 kilobytes (KB) main storage
Up to 512KB of main storage directly
addressable
Instruction set (179 instructions)
implemented in microcode
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose registers per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Error log
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/au to restart
Eight address spaces available to software
Data channel- Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable
Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation
Data transfer on byte or word basis
All data checked for parity on a byte
basis
Data transfer at 2.42 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).

The processor is a full-width unit with 13 I/Ofeature locations. It is a modular unit thatmounts in a 4997 Rack Enclosure or an EIA
standard 19-inch rack.
When an I/O expansion unit is added to thesystem , the required repower card uses one ofthe processor I/O feature locations.

Model upgrade
A field-installed model upgrade is available toconvert a Model B to a Model BIO, EI0 or KOO .
The Model BlO can also be converted to a
Model EI0 or KOO. See your IBM
representative for further information.

Note: The Model B has been replaced by the
Model BlO, and can no longer be ordered.

11111 111111111111111111 111 11111111111111111111111111111

Chapter 3. Series/I processors and features3-3

4956 Processor specifications (Model 6ID)
Operating characteristics

Environmental conditions

Storage cycle time
550 nanoseconds
Average instruction
time (weighted)
2.3 microseconds
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 400 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.42 megabytes per
secondHeat output/hour
650 watts (2220 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

Disk operating characteristics
Rotational speed
Average latency(nominal)
Instantaneous
data rate
Access times
Cylinder to cylinder
Average seek
Total usable storage
Cylinders
Tracks per cylinder
Sectors per track
Bytes per sector

3151 ± 3% RPM
9.52 milliseconds
1.25 megabytes per
second9 milliseconds
35 milliseconds
61. 7 megabytes
888 (2 reserved)

Power requirements (at full load)
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

7.0 amperes
6.7 amperes
3.9 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.81
1
15 amperes

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

4

70 (68 usable)
256

Prerequisites
None required.

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight3-4

356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
546 millimeters (21.5 in.)50.4 kg (111 lb)
72.6 kg (160 lb)

IBM Series/! Digest

4956 Processor (Model 6ID)
Standard features

Optional features

•
•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

High-performance Series/l processor
1024KB of main storage
Up to 5I2KB of mapped main storage
Instruction set (179 instructions)
implemented in microcode
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose r egisters per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Error log
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/auto restart
Eight address spaces available to software
Data channel
Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable
Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation
Data transfer on byte or word basis
All data checked for parity on a byte
basis
Data transfer at 2.42 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).
Integrated 60-megabyte disk.

The processor is a full-width modular unit thatmounts in a 4997 Rack Enclosure, a stand-alone
enclosure, or an EIA standard 19-inch rack. It
conta ins six I/O feature locations and includes
an integrated 60-megabyte disk, with optional
Cache. When an I/O expansion unit is added toth e system, the required repower card uses oneof th e processor I/O feature locations.

•

•

•

•

Floating-point (feature 3925) - Both singleand double-precision arithmetics areavailable using 30 additional instructions
and four 64-bit registers per priority
interrupt level. It does not use a feature
location and can be field-installed.
Diskette Drive (feature 4100) - Provides adiskette drive with 1.2 megabytes of diskettestorage.
Stand-Alone Enclosure (feature 4520) Provides a tabletop enclosure that allows
the processor to be installed without a rack.
Can be field-installed. If more than one
enclosure is used, the external-shieldedStand-Alone Enclosure Cable (feature 4525)
is needed.
Programmer Console (feature 5655) Provides indicators and controls for
operator-oriented systems where programs
are tested or entered and run.
Cache (feature 6400) - Provides a 64KB
cache that is microprocessor-controlled andcan significantly improve system
performance. Test cases of typicalapplications have shown improvements in
disk throughput ranging from 50% to morethan 200% . Cache functions aretransparent to programming. The Cache
option does not require a feature position
and is not field-installable.

Note: The Model 60D has been replaced by the
Model 61D. Models 30D and 60D can no longer
be ordered. Model 31D can be ordered as an
upgrade only.

Model upgrades
The following fi eld-installed model upgrades areavailable for the 4956 processors:••••

Model 30D
Model 31D
Model 60D
Model 61D

to
to
to
to

Models 31D, 6ID, E70
Models 61D, E70
Mod els 61D, E70
Model E70.

See your IBM representative for further
information.

"I" III """""
Chapter 3. Series/ l processors and features

3-5

4956 Processor specifications (Model EIO)
Operat . .ng characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Storage cycle time
550 nanoseconds
A verage instruction
time (weighted)
1.53 microseconds
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 400 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.42 megabytes per
second115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

6.0 amperes
5.8 amperes
3.3 amperes
3.0 amperes
2.9 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.70
1
15 amperes

Physical characteristics
Programming support
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
476 millimeters (18.75 in.)22.7 kg (50 lb)
42.2 kg (93 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
500 watts (1705 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%3-6

IBM Series/1 Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
None required.

4956 Processor (Model EIO)
Standard features

Optional features•••

Floating-point (feature 3926) - Both singleand double-precision arithmetics areavailable using 30 additional instructions
and four 64-bit registers per priority
interrupt level. Does not use a feature
location. Can be field-installed.

•

Programmer Console (feature 5655) Provides indicators and controls for
operator-oriented systems where programs
are tested or entered and run.

•

Storage Addition (feature 6330) - Provides
additional processor storage in 256KB
increments (maximum of three).

•Storage Addition (feature 6331) - Provides
an additional 512KB of processor storage(maximum of two).

•

Storage Addition (feature 6334) - Provides
an additional 1024KB of processor storage(maximum of one).

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

High-performance Series/l processor
1024KB of main storage (expandable to2048K)Up to 1024KB of mapped main storage
Instruction set (182 instructions)
implemented in microcode
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose registers per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Error log
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/auto restart
Sixteen address spaces available to software
Eight address spaces available to I/O
Data channel
Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable- Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation
Data transfer on byte or word basis
All data checked for parity on a bytebasis
- Data transfer at 2.42 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).
Address Resolution and Indirect Branch(ARIB) instructions provide Event Driven
Language (EDL) Acceleration capability.

Model upgrade
A field-installed model upgrade is available toconvert a 4956 Model E to a Model EI0 or KOO,
and convert a Model EI0 to a Model KOO. Seeyour IBM representative for further
information.

The processor is a full-width unit with 13 I/Ofeature locations. It is a modular unit thatmounts in a 4997 Rack Enclosure or an EIA
standard 19-inch rack.
When an I/O expansion unit is added to thesystem, the required repower card uses one ofthe processor I/O feature locations.
Note: The Model E has been replaced by the
Model EI0, and can no longer be ordered.

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-7

4956 Processor specifications (Model E70)
Operating characteristics

Environmental conditions

Storage cycle time
550 nanoseconds
Average instruction
time (weighted)
1.53 microseconds
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 400 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.42 megabytes per
secondHeat output/hour
650 watts (2220 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 -105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

Disk operating characteristics
Rotational speed
Average latency(nominal)
Instantaneous
data rate

3151 ± 3% RPM
9.6 milliseconds
1.25 megabytes per
secondAccess times
Cylinder to cylinder 5.4 milliseconds
Average seek
35 milliseconds
Total usable storage 61. 7 megabytes
Cylinders
888 (2 reserved)
Tracks per cylinder
4
Sectors per track
70 (68 usable)
Bytes per sector
256

Power requirements (at full load)
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

7.0 amperes
6.7 amperes
3.9 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.81
1
15 amperes

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prereq uisites
None required.

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

3-8

346 millimeters (13.75 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
578 millimeters (22.75 in.)50.4 kg (111 lb)
72.6 kg (160 lb)

IBM Series/1 Digest

4956 Processor (Model E70)
Standard features

Optional features

•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

High-performance Series/I processor
1024KB of main storage (expandable to2048K)Up to 1024KB of mapped main storage
Instruction set (182 instructions)
implemented in microcode
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose registers per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Error log
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/auto restart
Sixteen address spaces available to software
Eight address spaces available to I/O
Data channel
Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable
Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation
Data transfer on byte or word basis
All data checked for parity on a byte
basis
Data transfer at 2.42 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).
Integrated 60-megabyte disk
Address Resolution and Indirect Branch(ARIB) instructions provide EDL
Acceleration capability.

The processor is a modular unit that mounts ina 4997 Rack Enclosure, a stand-alone enclosure,or an EIA standard 19-inch rack. The processor
is a full-width unit with six I/O feature
locations.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Floating-point (feature 3926) - Both singleand double-precision arithmetics areavailable using 30 additional instructions
and four 64-bit registers per priority
interrupt level. Does not use a feature
location. Can be field-installed.
Diskette Drive (feature 4100) - Provides adiskette drive with 1.2 megabytes of diskettestorage.
Stand-Alone Enclosure (feature 4520) Provides a tabletop enclosure that allows
the processor to be installed without a rack.
Can be field-installed. If more than one
enclosure is used, the external-shieldedStand-Alone Enclosure Cable (feature 4525)
is needed to connect them together.
Programmer Console (feature 5655) Provides indicators and controls for
operator-oriented systems where programs
are tested or run.
Storage Addition (feature 6330) - Provides
additional processor storage in 256KB
increments (maximum of three).
Storage Addition (feature 6331) - Provides
an additional 512KB of processor storage(maximum of two).
Storage Addition (feature 6334) - Provides
an additional 1024KB of processor storage(maximum of one).
Cache (feature 6400) - Provides a 64KB
cache that is microprocessor controlled andcan significantly improve system
performance. Test cases of typicalapplications have shown improvements in
disk throughput ranging from 50% to morethan 200%. Cache functions aretransparent to programming. The Cache
option does not require a feature position
and is not field-installable.

When an I/O expansion unit is added to thesystem, the required repower card uses one ofthe processor I/O feature locations.

Note: The Model 60E has been replaced by the
Model E70, and can no longer be ordered.

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-9

4956 Processor specifications (Models G 10 and HI0)
Operating characteristics

Environmental conditions

Storage cycle time
550 nanoseconds
A verage instruction
time (weighted)
Model GI0
2.3 microseconds
Model HI0
1.53 microseconds
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 400 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.42 megabytes per
secondHeat output/hour
600 watts (2040 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 -105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

Disk operating characteristics
Rotational speed
3600 RPM
A verage latency(nominal)
8.3 milliseconds
Instantaneous
data rate
625 kilobytes per second
Access times
Cylinder to cylinder 8 milliseconds
Average seek
40 milliseconds
Total usable storage 40 megabytes
Cylinders733
Tracks per cylinder
7
Sectors per track
32
Bytes per sector
256

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

3-10

346 millimeters (13.75 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
576 millimeters (22.75 in.)
55 kg (121 lb)
72.6 kg (160 lb)

IBM Series/I Digest

Power requirements (at full load)
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

7.0 amperes
6.7 amperes
3.9 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60 ± 3.0 Hz
0.81
115 amperes

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
None required.

4956 Processor (Models G 10 and H10)
Standard features

Optional features

•
•

•

•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

High-performance Series/l processor
1024KB of main storage (expandable to2048KB in the Model HI0)
Model GI0 has up to 512KB of mapped mainstorage, and implements 179 instructions in
microcode
Model HlO has up to 1024KB of mappedmain storage, and implements 182
instructions in microcode
Cache storage (400KB)
One high-capacity (1.2 megabyte) 5.25-inch
diskette drive
One 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose registers per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Error log
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/auto restart
Eight (Model GI0) or sixteen (Model HI0)
address spaces available to software
Eight address spaces available to I/O (Model
H10)
Data channel
Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable- Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation- Data transfer on byte or word basis
All data checked for parity on a byte
basis
Data transfer at 2.42 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).
Address Resolution and Indirect Branch(ARIB) instructions provide EDL
Acceleration capability.

•

•

•

•
•
•

Floating-point for the Model GI0 (feature3925) and the Model HI0 (feature 3926) Both single- and double-precision
arithmetics are available using 30
additional instructions and four 64-bit
registers per priority interrupt level. Does
not use a feature location. Can befield-installed.
Programmer Console (feature 5655) Provides indicators and controls for
operator-oriented systems where programs
are tested or entered and run.
Storage Addition (feature 6334) - Provides
an additional 1024KB of processor storage
for the Model H10 only (maximum of one).
Second Diskette Drive (feature 4110) Provides a second high-capacity (1.2
megabyte) 5.25-inch diskette drive.
Second Disk Drive (feature 4115) - Provides
a second 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive.
Third Disk Drive (feature 4116) - Provides
a third 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive.
Stand-Alone Enclosure (feature 4521) Provides a tabletop enclosure that allows
the processor to be installed without a rack.

Model upgrade
A field-installed model upgrade is available toconvert a 4956 Model GI0 to a Model HI0 or
JOO, and convert a Model H10 to a Model JOO.
See your IBM representative for further
information.

The 4956 Models GlO and HI0 are full-width
units with 6 I/O feature locations. They aremodular units that mount in a 4997 Rack
Enclosure, a stand-alone enclosure, or an EIA
standard 19-inch rack.
When an I/O expansion unit is added to thesystem, the required repower card uses one ofthe processor I/O feature locations.

1111111111111111111111111111111

Chapter 3. Series/l processors and features

3-11

4956 Processor specifications (Model JOO)
Operating characteristics

Environmental conditions

Storage cycle time
360 nanoseconds
Average instruction
time (weighted)
1.0 microsecond
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 320 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.74 megabytes per
secondHeat output/hour
600 watts (2040 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

Disk operating characteristics
Rotational speed
3600 RPM
Average latency(nominal)
8.3 milliseconds
Instantaneous
data rate
625 kilobytes per second
Access times
Cylinder to cylinder 8 milliseconds
Average seek
40 milliseconds
Total usable storage 40 megabytes
Cylinders733
Tracks per cylinder
7
Sectors per track
32
Bytes per sector
256
Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

3-12

346 millimeters (13.75 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
576 millimeters (22.75 in.)
55 kg (121 lb)
72.6 kg (160 lb)

IBM Series/1 Digest

Power requirements (at full load)
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

7.0 amperes
6.7 amperes
3.9 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60±3.0 Hz
0.81
115 amperes

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
None required.

4956 Processor (Model JOO)
Standard features

Optional features

•
•
•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

High-performance Series/I processor
2048KB of main storage
Floating-point
Cache storage (400KB)
One high-capacity (1.2 megabyte) 5.25-inch
diskette drive
One 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose registers per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/auto restart
Sixteen address spaces available to software
Eight address spaces available to I/O
Data channel
Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable
Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation
Data transfer on byte or word basis
ECC (single-error correction,
double-error detection) done on abyte-basis
Data transfer at 2.74 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).
Address Resolution and Indirect Branch(ARIB) instructions provide EDL
Acceleration capability.

•

•
•
•

Programmer Console (feature 5655) Provides indicators and controls for
operator-oriented systems where programs
are tested or entered and run.
Second Diskette Drive (feature 4110) Provides a second high-capacity (1.2
megabyte) 5.25-inch diskette drive.
Second Disk Drive (feature 4115) - Provides
a second 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive.
Third Disk Drive (feature 4116) - Provides
a third 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive.
Stand-Alone Enclosure (feature 4521) Provides a tabletop enclosure that allows
the processor to be installed without a rack.

The processor is a full -width unit with 7 I/Ofeature locations. They are modular units thatmount in a 4997 Rack Enclosure, a stand-alone
enclosure, or an EIA standard 19-inch rack.
When an I/O expansion unit is added to thesystem, the required repower card uses one ofthe processor I/O feature locations.

1111111111111111111111111111111

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-13

4956 Processor specifications (Model KOO)
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Storage cycle time
360 nanoseconds
A verage instruction
time (weighted)
1.0 microsecond
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 320 nanoseconds
Maximum aggregate
data rate for multiple
cycle-stealing devices 2.74 megabytes per
second110 volts
115 volts
208 volts
230 volts
235 volts

6.3 amperes
6.0 amperes
3.3 amperes
3.0 amperes
2.9 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60 ± 3.0 Hz
0.7
115 amperes

Physical characteristics
Programming support
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
476 millimeters (18.75 in.)
23 kg (50 lb)
40.6 kg (89 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
500 watts (1705 .BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%3-14

IBM Series/l Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
None required.

4956 Processor (Model KOO)
Standard features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

High-performance Series/1 processor
2048KB of main storage
Floating-point
Four priority interrupt levels
Eight general-purpose registers per level
Byte-addressable storage
Error checking and correcting storage
Storage address relocation transfer function
Clock/comparator
Self-contained power supply that includes
communications power
Power failure detect/auto restart
Sixteen address spaces available to software
Eight address spaces available to I/O
Data channel
Up to 256 I/O devices directly
addressable
Direct program control or cycle-steal
operation
Data transfer on byte or word basis
ECC (single-error correction,
double-error detection) done on abyte-basis
Data transfer at 2.74 megabytes per
second (maximum aggregate).
Address Resolution and Indirect Branch(ARIB) instructions provide EDL
Acceleration capability.

The processor is a full-width unit with 14 I/Ofeature locations. It is a modular unit thatmounts in a 4997 Rack Enclosure or an EIA
standard 19-inch rack.
When an I/O expansion unit is added to thesystem, the required repower card uses one ofthe processor I/O feature locations.

Optional features
Programmer Console (feature 5655) - Provides
indicators and controls for operator-oriented
systems where programs are tested or enteredand run.

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

Chapter 3. Series/l processors and features

3-15

5170 System Unit specifications (Model 496)
Operating characteristics

Physical characteristics

Storage cycle time
945 nanoseconds
Average instruction
time (weighted)
7.4 microseconds
Storage read/write
access time (typical) 280 nanoseconds

System Unit
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightDisk operating characteristics

8.3 milliseconds

Display
Diagonal
measurement
Character capacity
Format625 kilobytes per second

Weight11.5 inches
2000
25 rows with 80
characters
7 kg (44 lb)

8 milliseconds
40 milliseconds
30 megabytes
733
5
17
512

Keyboard
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight

225 millimeters (9 in.)
540 millimeters (21.6 in.)
100 millimeters (3.9 in.)
2.8 kg (6.2 lb)

Rotational speed
Average latency(nominal)
Instantaneous
data rate
Access times
Cylinder to cylinder
Average seek
Total usable storage
Cylinders
Tracks per cylinder
Sectors per track
Bytes per sector

3600 ± .5 % RPM

Diskette operating characteristics
Rotational speed
Instan taneous
data ratehigh-capacity
dual-sided
Access time
track to track
Total usable storagehigh-capacity
dual-sided

162 millimeters (6.8 in.)
540 millimeters (21.3 in.)
439 millimeters (17.3 in.)
20 kg (44 lb)

Power requirements (at full load)
100 volts
240 volts

5.0 amperes
3.0 amperes

62.5 kilobytes per second
31.3 kilobytes per second

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.45
1
15 amperes

3 milliseconds

Programming support

1.2 megabytes
360 kilobytes•••

360 RPMEvent Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System
Input/Output Executive.

Environmental conditions
Prerequisites
Heat output/hour
360 watts (1229 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%••

Monochrome display and adapter, orColor Display and adapter.

CablesPrinter cable (feature 5612) is available forconnecting to the Monochrome display andprinter adapter.

3-16

IBM Series/l Digest

5170 System Unit (Model 496)
PC, IBM Personal Computer AT, and IBM
Personal Computer XT.

Standard feat ures
The IBM Series/1 System Unit 5170, Model 496
is a desk-top entry-level Series/1 computer.
Highlights are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/1 microprocessor runs Series/1
programs
1024K storage
IBM Personal Computer AT microprocessor(8 megahertz) controls I/O devices
30-megabyte fixed-disk drive
IBM Personal Computer enhanced keyboard
One high-capacity diskette drive
Six-port Terminal/Host Attachment card:
Four RS-422-A (local) ports- Two RS-232-C asynchronous ports (oneport may be used for bisynchronous).
Three I/O feature slots available
Performs Series/1 floating-point instructions(reduced speed)
Serial/Parallel adapter
Supports ASCII Display Stations
Designed for customer setup
One or two 4201 printers may be attachedCan operate as a stand-alone IBM Personal
Computer AT.

Optional features••

Second Six-Port Terminal/Host Attachment
card (feature 3629) - Provides attachment
for up to four additional RS-422-A (local)
a nd two additional RS-232-C ports. One
RS-232-C port made be used forbisynchronous connection.
30-Megabyte Fixed-Disk Drive (feature 0210)- Provides a second fixed-disk drive.

•

High-capacity Diskette Drive (feature 0206)- Provides a second diskette drive.

•

Dual-sided Diskette Drive (feature 0207) Permits the exchange of 320/360KB diskette
media between the IBM PC, IBM Portable•

Serial/Parallel Adapter (feature 0215) Provides a serial port and a parallel port.
The serial portion is fully programmableand supports asynchronous communications
from 300 to 9600 bau d. The parallel portion
provides the ability to attach various
devices that accept eight bits of paralleldata. This adapter does not support
current-loop operation. Maximum of two.

•

Binary Synchron ous Communications
Adapter (feature 1204) - Provides an EIA
RS-232-C interface. It is compatible with
the IBM PC, IBM Portable PC, and IBM
Personal Computer XT. A maximum of two;
one, if SDLC Adapter is installed.

•

SDLC Communications Adapter (feature1205) - Provides an EIA RS-232-C interface.
It is compatible with the IBM PC, the IBM
Portable PC, and the IBM Personal
Computer XT. Maximum of one.

•

Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter(feature 4900) - Required for theattachment of the 5151 Monochrome
Display and one 4201 Proprinter. Needs afull feature-expansion slot.

Note: The Binary Synchronous and SDLC
communications adapters operate mutually
exclusive of each other.

Chapter 3. Series/I processors and features

3-17

Attachment features specifications
Programming support

CablesEvent Driven Executive and Realtime
Programming System support:

•
•

•
•
•

Integrated Digital/Output Non-Isolated
featureTimers feature
Teletypewriter adapter feature .

Event Driven Executive also supports the GPIB
adapter feature.

Prereq u isites••

Series/1 processor
The appropriate attachment devices.

3-18

IBM Series/! Digest••

Teletypewriter Adapter Cable (feature 2055)
for the Teletypewriter Adapter feature.
Teletypewriter Adapter Cable with EIA
male connector (feature 2064) for theteletypewriter adapter feature .
Teletypewriter Adapter cable with EIA
female connector (feature 2065) for theteletypewriter adapter feature .
GPIB adapter cable (RPQ D02119) provides
a special 4-meter (13 foot) adapter cable thatconnects the GPIB adapter to a standard
IEEE 488/IEC 66.22 device.

Attachment features
Attachment feature cards provide for theattachment of user equipment and input/output
devices to a Series/1 processor. The feature
cards mount in the I/O feature locations of aSeries/1 processor, 4959 I/O Expansion Unit, or
4965 Diskette Drive and I/O Expansion Unit.
Attachment cards for devices described in
Chapter 4 are not included here.

Integrated Digital Input/Output
Non-Isolated
The Integrated Digital Input/Output
Non-Isolated (feature 1560) allows small
numbers of digital sensor I/O devices to be
attached in situations where the 4982 Sensor
Input/Output Unit is not required. The feature
contains 32 points (two 16-point groups) of
non-isolated digital input/process interrupt(DI/PI) and 32 points (two 16-point groups) ofdigital output (DO). Each group of 16 points is
separately addressable and has a 'ready' line
and a 'sync' line for synchronizing its operation
with attached devices.

TimersThe Timers (feature 7840) provides two 16-bit
timers that are packaged on one printed-circuit
card. Each timer can be used as an interval
timer, pulse counter, or pulse duration counter
with end-interrupt. The timers are separately
addressable and are independently started,
stopped, read, or set to any value underprogram control. The timers can be read
without disturbing their operation; however, to
set a timer's value or mode, it must be stopped.

and supports initial program load. DC current
loop, TTL, and EIA interface options areoffered.

GPIB Adapter
The General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
Adapter (RPQ D02118) provides Series/1
attachment capability for original equipment
manufacturers' (OEM) devices, instrumentation,and subsystems that conform to the IEEE
Standard 488, 1975. The adapter ismicroprocessor-controlled and cycle-stealing. It
provides for attachment of up to 14 addressabledevices per adapter. Maximum adapter speed is
65KB per second.

Programmable Cycle-Stealing
Digital Input/Digital Output
Attachment
The Programmable Cycle-Stealing DI/DO
Attachment (RPQ D02288) provides a
general-purpose, high-speed, digital
input/output interface for the attachment toSeries/1 of non-IBM devices, such as printers,plotters, graphics terminals, scientificinstrumentation, and sensor input/output frontends.
The attachment runs in programmable mode or
cycle-steal mode. In programmable mode, themicroprocessor, located in the attachment,
controls the interface and can run smaller
applications based on stored control logic
loaded from the Series/l. In cycle-steal mode,the microprocessor is bypassed; this allows
higher data rates of up to 800KB per second.

Teletypewriter Adapter
In addition to providing one of the attachment
options for the 316X ASCII Display Stations,
the Teletypewriter Adapter (feature 7850)
provides for the attachment of any of several
I/O devices. The adapter operates in duplex
mode at speeds up to 9600 bits per second (bps)

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-19

Attachment features
Multifunctio n Attachment
Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prereq uisites
Communications power (feature 2010) is
required when installed in a 4955 Model C or D
processor or an input/output expansion unit.
Cables••The Multifunction local attachment cable(feature 5770) is available as a 15.4 meter(50 foot) cable for RS-422-A attachment.
The Asynchronous local attachment cable(feature 2056) and EIA dataset cable(feature 2057) are available as 6.1-meter(20-foot) cables for RS-232-C attachment.

Highlights are:•••Provides four independent local
attachments or, optionally, three local
attachments and one remote attachment
Allows local attachment of devices to belocated up to 1219 meters (4000 feet) from a
Series/1
Has capabilities similar to other Series/1
remote attachment features.

The Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310)
provides for the local or remote attachment of
the many types of terminals and printers. The
feature card also provides for the remoteattachment to Series/1 of binary synchronous
communications (BSC) input/output devices and
BSC systems. The card mounts in an
input/output feature location of a Series/1
processor. 4959 Input/Output Expansion Unit,
or 4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit.
The card has four attachment ports. All four
ports can provide asynchronous
communications by means of the EIA RS-422-A(local) interface. Or, one port can be used forthe remote attachment of a device through a

3-20

IBM Series/l Digest

modem by means of the EIA RS-232-C interface
and the other three ports can be used for the
local attachment of devices. Both interfaces
allow data rates up to 9600 bits per second.
However, allowable data rates are configuration
sensitive.
The RS-422-A interface allows local attachmentof terminals and printers up to 1219 meters(4000 feet) from a Series/I. The Multifunction
Attachment provides for local attachment of the3101 Model 13 or 23 Display Terminal, 316X
Model 12 ASCII Display Station, 4201
Proprinter, 4202 Proprinter XL, 4224 (allModels), and the 4975 Model OIL or 02L Printer.
When a remote device is attached to a Series/1
through the RS-232-C interface, binary
synchronous communications or asynchronous
communications can be selected through device
initialization software in the operating system.
For binary synchronous communications, thefunctions of the BSC Single-Line Control(feature 2074) are provided to the application
program.
For asynchronous communications, a
half-duplex single line is available to theapplication program. The line is equivalent tothat of the Feature-Programmable Multiline
8-Line Communications Control (feature 2095)
and the Feature-Programmable Multiline 4-Line
Communications Adapter (feature 2096).
Specifically, all models of the 3101 Display
Terminal and 316X ASCII Display Stations aresupported, and the 4975 Model 01R or 02R
Printer is supported (the start/stop protocol
used to communicate with these remote printers
is unique). Also, any non-IBM device thatmeets the interface standards of thefeature-programmable adapter can be remotely
attached.

Attachment features

Prereq uisites

The IBM Multidrop Work Station Attachment(feature 1250) plugs into a Series/1 processor or
I/O expansion unit, and provides four cable
ports for multidrop of up to eight 4980 displays.
Each port provides interfaces for up to a
maximum total cable distance of 1219 meters(4000 feet). Speeds vary according to distanceas follows:

None required.

•

100 kilobits per second to 1219 meters (4000
feet)

•

250 kilobits per second to 844 meters (1600
feet)

•

500 kilobits per second to 422 meters (800feet).

Multidrop Work Station
Attachment
Programming support
Event Driven Executive.

Cables•••Feature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet) in length,
or customer-supplied cable.
Twinaxial cable-to-cable connector (part7362203) may be used to connect feature
5780 to twinaxial cable assembly (part7362267).
A Berg connector (part 6095524) may be
used with customer-provided twinaxial
cables to attach directly to the Multidrop
Work Station Attachment.

The attachment responds to eight device
addresses (one for each display). The
attachment can transfer data to and from
Series/1 storage using cycle-steal and Direct
Program Control (DPC).
The maximum number of Multidrop Work
Station Attachments installed in a Series/1 isdetermined by the number of available feature
positions in the processor or I/O expansion unit.

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-21

Attachment features
Printer Attachment - 5200 Series

Configura tions

Programming support

When all printers are the same type, the fivepossible configurations are:••Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

•

Up to eight 5219s

Prerequisites•

Up to eight 5224s

None required.

•

Up to four 5225s

Cables•Up to two 5262s.

Feature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet) in length, or
customer-supplied cable.

The following configurations illustrate the mixof printer types that can be connected:

The Series/1 Printer Attachment - 5200 Series(feature 5640) plugs into a Series/1 processor or
I/O expansion unit. The attachment has two
ports that physically connect and logically
adapt the 5219 (Model DOl and D02), 5224
(Modell and 2), 5225 (Modell, 2, 3, and 4), or
5262 Printer to the processor data channel.

••

Data can be transmitted and received up to a
distance of 1524 meters (5000 feet). The
attachment supports the transfer of data in data
stream mode or 4975 emulation mode. The
printer is connected to the attachment by atwinaxial cable.
Up to a maximum of eight printers can beconnected to the attachment (no more thanseven on one port).

3-22

IBM Series/l Digest

•
•
•
•
•

Any mix of up to eight 5219s or 5224s
One 5225 and any mix of up to seven 5219s
or 5224s
Two 5225s and any mix of up to five 5219s
or 5224s
Three 5225s and any mix of up to three5219s or 5224s
Four 5225s and either one 5219 or one 5224
One 5262 and up to five 5219s
Two 5262s and up to three 5219s.

Note: When any mix of 5219, 5224, or 5225
printers are connected, only printers of thesame type can be physically located within 30.5
meters (100 feet) of the attachment (feature5640).

Attachment features
Series/l-to-Personal Computer
Channel Attachment

Highlights include:•

The attachment card contains a 64KB
storage that is mapped as part of the IBM
Personal Computer storage; 48KB of thisshared storage is used to transfer data
between the Series/I and the Personal
Computer. The data can then betransferred at the cycle·stealing rate of theSeries/I channel.

•

Series/I feature 4000 provides theattachment card and an IBM Personal
Computer channel interface card.

•

Series/I feature 4001 provides the cable toconnect the attachment card to the IBM
Personal Computer.

Programming support•

Realtime Programming System•

Series/I-PC Connect.

Prerequisites
None required.

CablesFeature 4001, or customer-supplied cable.
The Series/I-to·Personal Computer Channel
Attachment provides a high·speed data transfer
between systems to allow the Series/I to be aneffective gateway and server system in an IBM
P ersonal Computer network.
Note: The Series/I-to· Personal Computer
channel Attachment can be used with the IBM
PC, IBM PC XT, and IBM PC AT (except the
IBM PC XT Model 286).

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-23

Communications features specifications
Programming support

Realtime Programming System

Event Driven Executive

•

•

•

•

Support is provided in the base operating
system for:
BSC features- ACC features- Series/l-to-Series/l attachment
Specific device support has been validated
for communications with the following:
Series/l
System/370 (BSC, SDLC, and Channel
attachment)
2741 Communication Terminal
3101/316X displays
5100 Portable computer
5110 Computer
Teletype 1 Model ASR 33/35 orequivalent
Tektronix 2 Model 4013 graphics
terminal or equivalent.
Support is available in other Ev~mt Driven
Executive based licensed programs for:
SDLC through the Support for Systems
Network Architecture
System/370 Channel Attach through the
System/370 Channel Attachment
program

Trademark of the Teletype Corp.
Trademark of Tektronix, Inc.

3-24

IBM Series/1 Digest••

Support is provided in the base operating
system for:
BSC features- SDLC features- ACC features
Specific device support has been validated
for communications with the following:
Series/l
System/3
System/32
System/34
System/370 (BSC, SDLC, and Channel
attachment)
2740/2741 Communication Terminal
3101/316X displays
3271/3274/3275/3276 Control Unit (BSC)
3684 Point-of-Sale Controller Unit
5260 Retail System
6670 Information Distributor
Teletype Model ASR 33/35 or equivalent
Support is available in other Realtime
Programming System based licensed
programs for:
System/370 Channel Attach through the
System/370 Channel Attachment
programData Link Control Adapter through the
Packet Network Support.

Communications features specifications
Prerequisites
•

•

•

•

•

Communications power (feature 2010) is
required on the 4955 Models C and D
processor and the 4959 input/output
expansion unit (below serial number 22499,
domestic):
Binary Synchronous Communications
Single-line Control
Binary Synchronous Communications
4-line Adapter
Synchronous Data Link Control
Single-line Control
Asynchronous Communications 4-line
Adapter
Synchronous Communications
Single-line Control/High speed
Binary Synchronous Communications 8-line
Control (feature 2093) is required for the
Binary Synchronous Communications 4-line
Adapter feature.
Asynchronous Communications 8-line
Control (feature 2091) is required for the
Asynchronous Communications 4-line
Adapter feature.
Feature-Programmable Communications
8-line Control (feature 2095) is required for
the Feature-Programmable Communications
4-line Adapter feature.
4993 Series/1-System/370 Termination
Enclosure is required for each
Seri es/1-System/370 Channel Attachment
feature.

•

•

•

•

•

•
•

•

•
•

Limitatio ns•

Cables••F eature 2056, the Asynchronous Local
Attachment Communications cable, can beused with features 1310, 1610, 2092, and2096.

Feature 2057, the EIA dataset cable, can beused with features 1310, 1610, 2074, 2090,
2092, 2094, and 2096.
Feature 2058, the BSC/High Speed cable(for Western Electric 303 3 interface), can beused with feature 2075.
Feature 2060, the BSC V.35/High Speed
DDN cable (for EIA/CCITT V.35 interface),can be used with features 2075 and 2080.
Feature 2061, the Feature-ProgrammableMultiline Current Loop cable, can be usedwith feature 2096.
Feature 2062, the EIA Duplex cable for pairof SDLC adapters, can be used with feature
2090.
Feature 2067, the X.21 cable, can be usedwith feature 2080.
Feature 2944, the Shielded EIA cable, canbe used with features 1310, 1610,2074, 2090,
2092, 2094, and 2096.
Feature D02014, the Auto-call Originate
Attachment cable, can be used with feature
D02013.
Feature D02352, the Series/1-3101 cable, canbe used with feature D02350.
Features D02246 and D02268, theSeries/1-Series/1 cable andincrement/replace cable, can be used withfeature D02242.

No more than 24 communications lines, ofany combination, can terminate in any
processor or input/output expansion unit.
No more than eight Binary Synchronous
Communications Single-Line Control/High
Speed features (feature 2075) can beinstalled in any processor or input/output
expansion unit.

Product of Western Electric Company

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-25

Communications features
Series/l communications features provide avariety of communications options. Two typesof communications features are available:features that plug into the processor datachannel (discussed in this chapter) and featuresthat plug into the 4987 Programmable
Communications Subsystem (discussed in
Chapter 4).

These features provide a choice of several
single- and multiple-line data communications
capabilities. In addition, there is a choice ofline speeds, line configurations, clocking
sources, and data codes. All communications
features (except binary synchronous/high speed)
are capable of automatic answering on switchedlines.

Five types of attachment features provide
communication with remote terminals andsystems:

Other features enhance the versatility of theSeries/l communications capabilities. For
example, the Local Communications Controller
feature provides access to other Series/l
processors connected on a high-speed ring.
Also, the Series/l -System/370 Channel
Attachment feature allows the Series/l to bechannel attached to a System/370.

•

Binary synchronous communications (BSC)•

Synchronous data link control (SDLC)•

Asynchronous communications control
(ACC)

•

Feature-programmable•

Synchronous Communications Single-Line
Control/High Speed (SCSLC).

Attributes
Point-to-point nons witched
Point-to-point switched
Multipoint
Primary station
Secondary station
Manual call/answer
IPL (host initiated)
Modem clocking
Business machine clocking
Error recovery facilities

FeatureprogrammableSDLC

BSC (1)ACC

SCSLC (2)

X
X
X (4)
X
X (4)
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X (4)
X
X (4)

-

-

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X (3)
X
X
X
X (3)
X (5)
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

-

X
X

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Also applies to the remote capabilities of the Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310).
Supports V .35 and X.21 interfaces (no RS-232-C capability).
Not available on BSC high-speed.
No provision for recognition of station addresses. If used as a secondary station in a multipoint
network, station address recognition must be provided by programming.
Single-line only.

3-26

IBM Series/l Digest

Communications features
Binary synchronous (BSC) features

Synchronous (SDLC) feature•

The Synchronous Data Link Control
Single-Line Control (feature 2090) controls theserial transfer of data to and from remoteterminals or host systems by using modems andcommunication line facilities. The following
communication characteristics apply to the
SDLC feature:

•

•

•

Binary Synchronous Communications
Single-Line Control (feature 2074) - Thisfeature provides circuitry for one
half-duplex line at data rates up to 9,600 bps
on a switched or nonswitched basis. It also
provides the ability to perform an initialprogram load (IPL) on the processor from ahost system and can be used as either a
primary or secondary station.
Binary Synchronous Communications
Single-Line Control/High speed (feature2075) - This feature provides circuitry for
one half-duplex line at speeds up to 56,000
bps on a nons witched basis only. It also
provides the ability to perform an initialprogram load (IPL) on the processor from ahost system and can be used as either a
primary or secondary station.
Binary Synchronous Communications
8-Line Control (feature 2093) - This featureprovides control circuitry for up to two BSC
4-line adapters. Data rates are 9600 bps forlines 1 and 2 and up to 2400 bps on lines 3
through 8 when two adapters are used.
When a single 4-line adapter is used, thedata rates for each line can be up to 4800
bps. The 8-line control can be used aseither a primary or secondary station.
Binary Synchronous Communications
4-Line Adapter (feature 2094) - This featureprovides circuitry for up to four half-duplex
lines. Data rates are dependent on thenumber of lines and the line speeds used.
Control circuitry is provided by theprerequisite BSC 8-line control feature.

•

Communicates using EBCDIC or ASCII (orany other 8-bit) code•

Single-line, medium-speed, half-duplexed
device that can operate on switched or
nonswitched lines•

Operates in a duplex environment byinstalling two cards (one as a transmitterand one as a receiver) in adjacent feature
locations•

Data rates up to 19,200 bps with external
clocking•

Operates as a primary or secondary station•

Internal clocking is available with bit rates
of 600 bps or 1,200 bps•

Nonreturn-to-zero-inverted (NRZI) andnonreturn-to-zero (NRZ) coding•

Provides answer-tone by installing aJumper.

Chapter 3. Series!l processors and features

3-27

Communications features
Asynchronous (ACC) features•••

Asynchronous Communications Single-Line
Control (feature 1610) - This featureprovides circuitry for one half-duplex line atdata rates up to 9600 bps on a switched or
nonswitched basis. It can be used as eithera primary station or secondary station.
This feature does not provide forrecognition of station addresses. If thefeature is to be used as a secondary station
in a multipoint network, station address
recognition must be provided byprogramming.

Feature-programmable multiline
communications features•

Feature-Programmable Multiline 8-Line
Communications Control (feature 2095) This feature provides the control circuitry
for up to two programmable 4-line
communications adapters. Point-to-point or
multipoint operations are supported with anaggregate controller throughput of 64,000
bits per second (based on a 12-bit character).

•

Feature-Programmable Multiline 4-Line
Communications Adapter (feature 2096) This feature provides the circuitry tosupport up to four communications lines.
Each line can be programmed to select:

Asynchronous Communications 8-Line
Control (feature 2091) - This featureprovides the control circuitry for up to two
ACC 4-line adapters. It can be used as a
primary or secondary station.

Speed - 37.5 bps to 1200 bps, or 300 bps
to 19,200 bps
Synchronous or asynchronous operation
5, 6, 7, or 8 bits per character
Odd, even, or no parity
checking/generation
Stop-bit length of 1 or 2
Synchronization character specification
Change-of-direction (COD) character
recognition
Echo-plex operation
Break operation recognition/generation
Block check character reception (for 1
character).

Asynchronous Communications 4-Line
Adapter (feature 2092) - This featureprovides circuitry for up to four half-duplex
lines. Each of these lines can operate atdata rates up to 2400 bps. Control circuitry
is provided by the ACC 8-line control.

Each line can also be jumpered for:
•
•

3-28

IBM Series/1 Digest

EIA RS-232-C or current loop interface
Modem controls for direct connect, switchedline, and nons witched line.

Communications features
Synchronous Communications
Single-Line Control/High Speed
Highlights are:
•
•
•
•
•
•

BSC or SDLC/HDLC protocol
Up to 56,000 bps line speed
CCITT V.35 interface (leased)
CCITT X.21 interface (switched or leased)
Full or half duplex operation with
SDLC/HDLC
Remote initial program load (IPL)
capability.

The Series/1 Synchronous Communications
Single-Line Control/High Speed (feature 2080)
provides the function required to attach theSeries/1 to network interfaces conforming to
the Consultative Committee International
Telephone and Telegraph (CCITT)
recommendation V.35 or X.21.
The hardware can operate with either of two
protocols:••

Binary synchronous communications (BSC):
Half duplex communications at speeds up to
56,000 bits per second (bps) by using V.35
interfaces (leased) or up to 48,000 bps using
an X.21 interface (switched or leased). A
local BSC connection supports speeds up to
48,000 bps.
Synchronous data link control (SDLC):
SDLC or high level data link control(HDLC) can operate in full-duplex modewith the same interfaces and speeds
mentioned above. A local connection isavailable at speeds of 48,000 or 9,600 bps.

Note: BSC and SDLC software support for
X.21 interface is available at speeds of
19,200 or 9600 bps.
The hardware supports multipoint operation.
The feature consists of a single card, which
mounts in a Series/1 processor or I/O expansion
unit. It allows the connection of a Series/1 on aswitched or nonswitched line totelecommunications networks requiring an X.21
standard interface.

Programming support

Nonswitched support:•••

BSC X.21 is supported by:- Event Driven Executive Version 3.1- Realtime Programming System
SDLC X.21 is supported by:
Event Driven Executive Support of
Systems Network Architecture(5719-SX1)
Realtime Programming System
HDLC is supported by:
X.25/HDLC Realtime Programming
System Communications Support(5719-HD1).

Switched X.21 support:••

BSC is supported by Realtime Programming
System and Event Driven Executive.
SDLC is supported by Realtime
Programming System and Event Driven
Executive.

Prerequisites
When the V.35 interface is used,
Communications Power (feature 2010) is
required on the 4955 Model C or D processor or
the I/O expansion unit.
CablesFor attachment to a data communications
equipment (DCE) arrangement conforming to
CCITT recommendation V.35, the BSC
V.35/High Speed DDN cable (feature 2060) is
available. The cable is 6.1 meters (20 feet) long.
For attachment to a DCE arrangement
conforming to CCITT X.21, the X.21 cable(feature 2067) is available.
Local connection cables are a customer
responsibility.

Chapter 3. Series/l processors and features

3-29

Communications features
Telephone Communications
Controller and Adapter
Highlights are:•Automatically answers and originates calls•

Generates and detects standard pushbutton
signals•

Digitally encodes and decodes voice signals•

Transfers data to and from the processor.

The IBM Series/1 Telephone Commu nications
Controller (feature 7880) and IBM Series/1
Telephone Communications Adapter (feature7881) combine to provide an attachment
capability for public or private switched
telephone lines. Each Controller provides thecontrol and data transfer function for one tofour Adapters. Each Adapter allows theattachment of one line.
These features interface the Series/1 to acustomer installed telephone service con necting
arrangement. The features allow telephone
calls to come in and out of the Series/1 forprocessing by Series/1 application software.
The Adapter answers and originates calls,
generates and detects standard pushbutton
phone signals. and digitally encodes anddecodes voice signals.

3-30

IBM Series/I Digest

Programming support
The Telephone Communications Controller and
Adapter are supported on the Series/1 only by
the Audio Distribution System (5719-U20). The
licensed program requires a dedicated system.

Prereq u isit es
Telephone Communications Adapter requires a
Telephone Communications Controller (feature7880). Both features can be installed in any
Series/l processor or expansion unit. The
available software, however, requires a 4955
Model F processor configuration.

Cables•The Telephone Communications Adapter
cable - DAA (feature 2070) provides forconnection to a data access arrangement(DAA).

•The Telephone Communications Adapter
cable - VCA (feature 2071) provides forconnection to a voice connecting
arrangement (VCA).

Communications features
cables. Cable assemblies, bulk cables, andconnector kits can be ordered from IBM toprovide the link between processors. Up to
16 Series/I processors can be interconnected
on a ring.

Other communications features•

Series/l-System/370 channel Attachment(feature 1200) provides a high-speed datatransfer capability (300,000 bytes per
second) between a Series/I and any of thefollowing IBM processors:•

Auto-Call Originate Attachment Card (RPQ
D02013) provides 12 input lines and 12
output lines for controlling up to two
auto-call modems under direct program
control (EIA RS-366 interface). It also
provides 16 digital input/process interrupt
points and 16 digital output non-isolated
points under direct program control.

•

Series/l-to-Series/l Attachment (RPQs
D02241 and D02242) permit the direct
coupling of two Series/I processors at
distances of up to 21 meters (65 feet) .
Communication is in cycle-steal mode andoperates at instantaneous data rates of up
to 55,000 bytes per second. The Series/Is
operate in a peer-to-peer relationship,
except that the processor with RPQ D02241
installed prevails during data transfer
contention.

•

Direct BSC Attach (RPQ D02349) provides ahalf-duplex, single-line interface forconnecting one Series/I to another Series/I
up to 1219.2 meters (4000 feet) away. Theinterface conforms to EIA RS-422-A
interface standards and transmits data at
38,000 bits per second. This attachment
must be installed on both Series/I
processors.

•

Asynchronous Direct 8-Line RS-422-A
Adapter (RPQ D02350) provides eight
RS-422-A interfaces for local attachment of
RS-422-A devices such as the 316X Display
Terminals. It is used with the
Feature-Programmable 8-Line
Communications Control (feature 2095) inplace of the Feature-ProgrammableMultiline 4-Line Communications Adapter(feature 2096). Data rates of up to 19,200
bits per second are allowed with anaggregate controller throughput of 64K bps(based on a 12-bit character). Attacheddevices can be placed up to 1219.2 meters(4000 feet) from the Series/I.

System/370 (Models 135 through 168)3031. 3032, 3033, 3081
4331. 4341.
The feature occupies 32 device addresses on
the System/370 channel and a single device
address on the Series/I. IPL capability isprovided. The feature requires 32
contiguous device addresses on the
System/370 channel and a single device
address on the Series/I channel. IPL of theSeries/I from the host System/370 is
supported.
Communications between the Series/I and
the System/370 is accomplished by thecooperative processing of programs in eachprocessor. The S/370 programs use a subsetof the 3272 command set to access thefeature. The Series/I programs use theSeries/I Operate I/O instruction along with
IDCB and DCB command codes and formats
defined specifically for the feature.
•

Local Communication Controller (feature1400) is intended for high-speed serial data
communications between two or more
processors. The feature card allows
multiple processors to be attached together
by way of a ring data link without the needof a primary station. This type ofconfiguration accommodates high-speed,
storage-to-storage data transfer between two
processors.
The controller is clocked at 2 million bits
per second. A built-in modem provides bit
synchronization. The maximum distanceallowed between any two active processors
is 1524 meters (5000 feet) for twinaxial
cables or 610 meters (2000 feet) for coaxial

Chapter 3. Series/1 processors and features

3-31

Communications features
Communications support features•

Communications Indicator Panel (feature2000) is available as an option to thecommunications features on the datachannel of a 4959 or a full-width processor.
It mounts under the front cover andprovides a means of displaying various
states and conditions of lines and also ameans of manually controlling certain
modem functions. The panel can be usedwith any of the communications features,
one at a time.

3-32

IBM Series/ l Digest•

Communications Power (feature 2010)provides the additional ± 12-volt regulated
power required for attachment of one ormore communications feature cards to theprocessor I/O channel. It is required in theprocessor or the I /O expansion unit where
communications features are installed: It is
required on a 4955 Model C or D Processor
or a 4959 Input/Output Expansion Unit
below serial number 22499 (domestic only).

4

Series/1 input/output and system support unitsChapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support
units
Series/l input/output devices are designed to contribute to efficient system
performance. Many devices are equipped with cycle-stealing
microprocessor controllers that permit device overlapping and reduce
processor workload.
Series/l I/O units include disk, diskette, magnetic tape, printers, anddisplay stations.
The 4982 Sensor I/O Unit provides control for a number of sensor digital
and analog feature cards, and offers a flexible, modular approach for
attaching the user's process I/O applications to the Series/I.
The 4987 Programmable Communications Subsystem expands the Series/lcommunications versatility. It can support a large number of lines andmultiple line disciplines in a single communications unit.
Storage-to·storage communication between Series/l and System/370
processors is provided by the 4993 Series/l - System/370 Termination
Enclosure and its companion channel attachment feature.
Note: Programming support refers to the latest version and release levelthat was announced at the time this document was printed. Programming
support is available under separate license.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-1

4959 Input/Output Expansion Unit specifications
Physical characteristics

Programmin g s upport

HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShippin g weight••356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
476 millimeters (18.75 in.)22.7 kg (50 lb)
37.5 kg (87 lb)

Environmental conditions

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequis it es••

Series/1 processor
Channel repower (feature 1565) is required:Heat output/hour
500 watts (1705 BTU)
Cooling
For ced a ir
Operating temperatu re
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%In processors for the first expansion
unit attached
In all expansion units, when more than
one expansion unit is attached.

CablesPower requirements (at full load)
100 volts
115 volts
200 volts
208 volts
230 volts

7.0 amperes
6.1 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes
3.2 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5Hz
0.7
1
15 amperes

4-2

IBM Series/! Digest

Input/output cables for the processor datachannel are u sed to attach the 4959 to a
Series/1 processor.

4959 Input/Output Expansion Unit
Standard features

OptIonal features•

Fourteen input/output feature locations for
attachment of devices to a Series/1••

Designed for mounting in a 4997 Rack
Enclosure or an EIA standard 19-inch rack
enclosure.

Channel Repower (feature 1565) - Thisfeature repowers the data channel along a
chain of I/O expansion units. The feature isalways installed in the preceding unit andprovides channel repower for thesubsequent unit. A maximum of five
Channel Repower features can be installed
in a Series/1 configuration. The limit isthree for any processor configuration with
the Two-Channel Switch or Programmable
Two-Channel Switch.

•

Programmable Two-Channel Switch (feature7777) - This feature electronically switches
common I/O devices between two Series/1
processors. The unit also allows directcommunication between the two Series/1
processors. At all times, the unit logicallyconnects the common channel" features tothe I/O interface of one Series/1 processor
while listening to the interface of bothprocessors.

•

Two-Channel Switch (feature 7900) - Thisfeature provides the capability for switching
the Series/1 channel between two
processors. Features located in either the4959 or 4965 in which the Two-Channel
Switch feature is located, and in expansion
units following in the chain, can beswitched between processors.

The 4959 provides additional I/O attachment
capability to supplement the I/O feature
locations provided within the Series/1
processors. A maximum of 14 I/O feature
locations are contained in a 4959. Attachment
features, data processing I/O attachment
features, the Programmable Two-Channel
Switch feature, and the sensor I/O unit
attachment feature can be installed in any 4959
I/O Expansion Unit.
The Programmable Two-Channel Switch or
Two-Channel Switch console is located on thefront panel of the 4959 unit, and is a part of theoptional feature . The console contains
indicator lights and switches for determining
the status of the feature and to allow for
manual switching. Upon failure of the primaryprocessor, the secondary or backup processor
receives an interrupt and can be programmed toswitch the common I/O. Manual intervention isrequired with the Two-Channel Switch featurewhen switching back to the primary processor,
not with the Programmable Two-Channel
Switch feature.
Note: The characteristics of the 4959 generally
apply to the expansion unit capabilities of the4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Units.

1111 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 .

Chapter 4. Series/ l input/output and system support units

4-3

4963 Disk Subsystem specifications
Operat ing characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Rotational speed
Average latency(nominal)
Ins tan taneous
data rate

100 volts
200 volts
208 volts
230 volts

5.0 amperes
2.5 amperes
2.5 amperes
2.5 amper es

FrequencykVA
Phase
Br anch circuit

60± 0.5 Hz
0.50
115 amperes

Access times
Cylinder to cylinder
A verage seek
Maxim urn seek
Total usable storage
Mode158A
Models 64A, 64B
Cylinders
Tracks per cylinder

3125 RPM
9.6 milliseconds
1.03 megabytes per
second9 milliseconds
27 milliseconds
45 milliseconds

Programming support
58.8 megabytes
64.5 megabytes
360
4 (minimum)
11 (maximum)
64
256

Sectors per track
Bytes per sector
Fixed-head storage(Model 58A)
Total usable stor age 131 kilobytes
Heads
8
Sectors per tr ack
64
Bytes per sector
256
Phys ical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weigh t

356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
584 millimeters (23 in.)54.4 kg (120 lb)
67.9 kg (150 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat ou tput /hour
242 watts (827 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - lO5°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-4

IBM Series/ l Digest••

Event Driven Execu tive
Realtime P r ogrammin g System.

Prerequisites
The 4963 Disk Su bsystem Attachmen t (feature3590) is required for each 4963 Model 58A or
64A.

4963 Disk Subsystem
Highlights include:•

Mid-range disk subsystem with up to 256
megabyte capacity•

Microprocessor control to optimize disk
performance•

One to four disks per subsystem - models
may be mixed•

Multiple subsystems may be attached•

27-millisecond average access time•

10.I-millisecond latency•

1.03-megabyte-per-second data rate.

Automatic retries on soft errors, automatic seek
to alternate sector (one alternate sector per
track plus use of spare sectors on tracks insame or adjacent cylinder eliminates seeks toalternate track), automatic seek overlap withread or write, and automatic error handling are
all under subsystem microprocessor control.
The microprocessor executes self-test
diagnostics on power up, reset, and duringquiescent periods. A three-sector speed
matching buffer reduces extra revolutions often
encountered on multiple sector read or write
operations.
Disk capacity (bytes)

This high-performance disk subsystem features
multiple microprocessors to off-load the Series/l
processor and optimize disk performance. Eachsubsystem has one primary drive and may haveup to three expansion drives (models may beintermixed). Multiple subsystems may be
attached. Each subsystem attaches to theSeries/l through one Disk Subsystem
Attachment (feature 3590) installed in a feature
location space in a processor, 4959 I/OExpansion Unit, or 4965 Storage and I/OExpansion Unit.

4963
mod elMo va b le heads

Fixed heads

64A
64B
58A

64 ,520,192
64,520,192
58,654,720

131,072

A
B =Primary unit
Expansion unit

The 4963 is a full-width unit that mounts in a4997 Rack Enclosure or an EIA standard
19-inch rack.

(I

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-5

4964 Diskette Unit specifications
Operating characteristics

P ower requirements (at full load)

Rotational speed
A verage latency(nominal)
Instantaneous
data rate
Access times
Track to track
Average seek
Total usable storageby type/sector size
1/128
1/256
1/512
2/128
2/256
2/512
Tracks per diskettesurface

115 volts
208 volts
230 volts

2.2 amperes
1.2 amperes
1.1 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.25
1
15 amperes

360 RPM
83.4 milliseconds
31.3 kilobytes per second
5 milliseconds
40 milliseconds

Program m ing s upport
246 kilobytes
284 kilobytes
303 kilobytes
493 kilobytes
568 kilobytes
606 kilobytes
77 (74 data)

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight356 millimeters (14 in.)
216 millimeters (8.5 in.)
590 millimeters (23.25 in.)18.1 kg (40 lb)
20 kg (44 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
230 watts (785 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-6

IBM Series/ l Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequ isites
The 4964 Diskette Unit Attachment (feature3581) is required.
Rack mounting fixture (feature 4540) is required
if mounting in an IBM 4997 Rack Enclosure oran EIA standard 19-inch rack enclosure.

4964 Diskette Unit
Highlights include:•

Removable storage on two-sided diskette;each side has 74 data tracks•

A verage data rate of 31,250 bytes per second•

Track-to-track access time of 40
milliseconds•

Selectable IPL capability.

The 4964 can be designated as either the
primary or alternate system IPL device. It
attaches to the Series/1 by means of the 4964
Diskette Unit Attachment feature , which can beplugged into either a processor unit or an I /O
expansion unit. A microprocessor located in
the diskette unit attachment feature controls
cycle-steal read/write operations and supports
multiple sector transfers. Extensive
microdiagnostics along with cyclic redundancy
checking are standard.

The 4964 Diskette Unit mounts in half thewidth of a 19-inch rack enclosure. It is adirect-access storage device that retrieves andrecords data on a single, removable magnetic
diskette and combines the small batch data
storage properties with many of the features ofmagnetic tape. The diskette has the added
advantage of providing direct access to a
specified group of records filed either
sequentially or randomly. Diskette data tracks
contain 128-, 256-, or 512-byte sectors. One-or
two-sided diskettes can be used. A two-sided
diskette provides maximum storage capacity,using the 512-byte sector format . A one- sided
diskette r ecorded in 128-byte sector format canbe used to exchange data with other IBM
devices.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-7

4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit specifications (Modell)
Disket te operating characteristics
Rotational speed
Average laten cy(nominal)
Instantaneous
data rate
Access times
Track to track
Average seek
Total usable storageby type/sector size
1/128
1/256
1/512
2/128
2/256
2/512
2D/256
2D/512
2D/1024
Tracks per diskettesurface360 RPM

62.5 kilobytes per second
5 milliseconds
40 milliseconds

7.0 amperes
3.5 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circu it

60±0.5 Hz
0.7
1
15 amperes

Programming support
246 kilobytes
284 kilobytes
303 kilobytes
493 kilobytes
568 kilobytes
606 kilobytes
985 kilobytes
1.1 megabytes
1.2 megabytes
77 (74 data)

356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
552 millimeters (21.75 in.)38.5 kg (85 lb)
43 kg (95 lb)

En vironmental c ondit ions
Heat output/h our
433 watts (1480 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-8

100 volts
200 volts

83.4 milliseconds

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

Power requirements (at full load)

IBM Series/1 Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequis ites
Channel Repower (feature 1565) is required
when attaching a 4965 to a processor or anotherexpansion unit.

4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Modell)•Standard features•

Double-density, two-sided or one-sided
diskette with a capacity of up to 1.2
megabytes•

Integrated diskette attachment card•

A vailable space and power for an optional
second diskette drive•

Four additional feature locations for
attachment of I/O features•

Selectable initial program load (IPL)
capacity.

The 4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit,
Model 001 , is a direct-access storage device that
retrieves and records data on removablemagnetic diskette. One diskette drive isstandard. A second diskette drive (feature 4100)
is optional.
In addition to being a diskette device, the 4965
contains additional input/output feature
locations, which a llow for the connection ofother Series/ l devices through the 4965 to a
Series/l processor. The attachment for thediskette is integrated as part of the 4965. The
4965 provides four I/O feature locations.

Two-Channel Switch (feature 7900) Provides the capability for switching theSeries/I channel between two processors.
Features located in the 4965 in which theswitch is located, and in expansion units
following in the chain, can be switchedbetween processors.

The 4965 can be designated as either the
primary or alternate system IPL device. A
microprocessor located in the integrated
attachment card controls cycle-steal read/write
operations and supports multiple diskettetransfers. Extensive microdiagnostics alongwith cyclic redundancy checks are standard.
Double-density, two-sided, or one-sided diskettes
can be used. The diskette provides directaccess to a specified group of records filed
either sequentially or randomly. Diskette data
tracks contain 128-, 256-, 512-, or 1024-byte
sectors. A double-density diskette provides
maximum storage capacity when it is formatted
with 1024-byte sectors. A one-sided disketterecorded in l28-byte sector format can be used
to exchange data with other IBM systems.
The 4965 is a modular unit that mounts in a4997 Rack Enclosure, a stand-alone enclosure,or an EIA standard 19-inch rack enclosure.

Optional feature s•

Diskette Drive (feature 4100) - Provides asecond diskette drive with 1.2 megabytes of
diskette storage.

•

Stand-Alone Enclosure (feature 4520) Provides a tabletop enclosure that allows
the 4965 to be installed without a rack.

IIIIII!IIIIIIIIIII!IIIIII

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-9

4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit specifications (ModeI60D)
Disk operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Rotational speed
Average latency(nominal)
Instantaneous
data rate

115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

7.0 amperes
6.7 amperes
3.9 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.81
1
15 amperes

Access times
Cylinder to cylinder
Average seek
Total usable storage
Cylinders
Tracks per cylinder
Sectors per track
Bytes per sector

3151 ± 3% RPM
9.5 milliseconds
1.25 megabytes per
second
5.4 milliseconds
35 milliseconds
61.7 megabytes
888 (2 reserved)
4

70 (68 usable)
256

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

For operating characteristics of the diskette
drive , see "4965 Storage and I /O Expansion Unit
(Modell)."

Prereq uisites

Physical characteristics

Channel Repower (feature 1565) is required
when attaching a 4965 to a processor or anotherexpansion unit.

HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

346 millimeters (13.75 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
576 millimeters (22.75 in.)50.4 kg (Ill lb)
72.2 kg (160 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
650 watts (2220 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

4-10

IBM Series/l Digest

4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Mode160D)•

Standard features•

60-megabyte disk storage•

Integrated attachment card•

Instantaneous data rate of 1.25 megabytes
per second•

Average access time less than 40
milliseconds•

Seven I/O feature locations•

Selectable IPL capability.

Two-Channel Switch (feature 7900) Provides the capability for switching theSeries/1 channel between two processors.
Features located in the 4965 in which theswitch is located, and in expansion units
following in the chain, can be switchedbetween processors.

The 4965 can be designated as either the
primary or alternate system IPL device. A
microprocessor located on the integrated
attachment card controls cycle-steal read/write
operations and supports multiple diskettetransfers. Extensive microdiagnostics alongwith cyclic redundancy checks are standard.

The 4965 Model 60D is a modular unit withseven I/O feature locations and includes anintegrated 60-megabyte disk with optional
Cache. The unit mounts in a 4997 Rack
Enclosure, a stand-alone enclosure, or an EIA
standard 19-inch rack enclosure.

Optio nal features•

Diskette Drive (feature 4100) - Provides anoptional diskette drive with 1.2 megabytes
of diskette storage.

•

Stand-Alone Enclosure (feature 4520) Provides a tabletop enclosure that allows
the 4965 to be installed without a rack. Can
be field-installed. If more than on enclosure
is used, the external-shielded Stand-Alone
Enclosure Cable (feature 4525) is needed toconnect them together.

•

Cache (feature 6400) - Provides the Model
30D and 60D with a 64K-byte cache that
pre-fetches and stores the most-used data
sectors. Test cases have shown
improvements in disk throughput ranging
from 50% to more than 200% . However,
performance improvements are application
dependent. Cache does not require afeature position and is not field-installable.

Double-density, two-sided, or one-sided diskettes
can be used. The diskette provides directaccess to a specified group of records filed
either sequentially or randomly. Diskette data
tracks contain 128-, 256-, 512-, or 1024-byte
sectors . A double-density diskette provides
maximum storage capacity when it is formatted
with 1024-byte sectors. A one-sided disketterecorded in 128-byte sector format can be used
to exchange data with other IBM systems.

111111111111111111

111111111111111111111111

Chapter 4. Series/! input/output and system support units

4-11

4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit specifications (Model EOO)
Disk operating characteristics

Environmental conditions

Rotational speed
A verage latency(nominal)
Instan taneous
data rate
Access times
Cylinder to cylinder
Average seek
Total usable storage
Cylinders
Tracks per cylinder
Sectors per track
Bytes per sector

Heat output/hour
600 watts (2040 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 -105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%3600 RPM
8.3 milliseconds
625 kilobytes per second
8 milliseconds
40 milliseconds
40 megabytes
733

7
32
512

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

346 millimeters (13.75 in.)
480 millimeters (19 in.)
576 millimeters (22.75 in.)
55 kg (120 lb)
72.6 kg (160 lb)

Power requirements (at full load)
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
230 volts
240 volts

7.0 amperes
6.7 amperes
3.9 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.4 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60 ± 3.0 Hz
0.81
115 amperes

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
Channel Repower (feature 1565) is required
when attaching a 4965 to a processor or anotherexpansion unit.

4-12

IBM Series/1 Digest

4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Model EOO)
Standard features

Optional featu res•

One 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive••

Cache storage (400KB)•

Instantaneous data rate of 625 kilobytes per
second•A verage access time less than 40
milliseconds

Channel Repower (feature 1565) - Repowers
the data channel along a chain of I/O
expansion units. The feature is always
installed in the preceding unit and provides
channel repower for the subsequent. unit.
Up to five Channel Repower features can beinstalled in a Series/1 configuration (up to
three for any processor configuration with
the Two-Channel Switch or Programmable
Two-Channel Switch).

•

Seven I/O feature locations••

Selectable IPL capability.

Diskette Drive (feature 4117) - Provides anoptional high-capacity 5.25-inch diskette
drive with 1.2 megabytes of diskette storage.

•

Second Disk Drive (feature 4115) - Provides
a second 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive.

•

Third Disk Drive (feature 4116) - Provides
a third 40-megabyte fixed-disk drive.

•

Programmable Two-Channel Switch (feature7777) - Electronically switches common I/O
devices between two Series/1 processors.
The unit also allows direct communication
between the two Series/1 processors. The
unit logically connects the common channel
features to the I/O interface of one Series/1
processor while listening to the interface ofboth processors.

•

Two-Channel Switch (feature 7900) Provides the capability for switching theSeries/1 channel between two processors.
Features located in either the 4959 or 4965
in which the Two-Channel Switch feature islocated, and in expansion units following in
the chain, can be switched between
processors.

The 4965 Model EOO is a modular unit withseven I/O feature locations and includes anintegrated 40-megabyte disk with 400KB Cache
standard. The unit mounts in a 4997 Rack
Enclosure or an EIA standard 19-inch rack
enclosure.
The 4965 can be designated as either the
primary or alternate system IPL device. A
microprocessor located on the integrated
attachment card controls cycle-steal read/write
operations and supports multiple diskettetransfers. Extensive microdiagnostics alongwith cyclic redundancy checks are standard.

n11111 11 111111111111111111111111

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-13

4967 High-Performance Disk Subsystem specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

2964 RPM (nominal)
Rotational speed
Average latency(nominal)
10.1 milliseconds
Instantaneous
1.5 megabytes per second
data rate
Access times
Cylinder to cylinder 9 milliseconds
Average seek
25 milliseconds
Total usable storage
200 megabytes
Model 2CA/2CB
359 megabytes
Model 3CA/3CB
CylindersModel 2CA/2CB
570
1022
Model 3CA/3CB
Tracks per cylinder
14
Sectors per track
50 (1 reserved)
Records per sector
2
Bytes per record
256

Model 2CA/3CA
110 volts
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
220 volts
240 volts
Model 2CB/3CB
110 volts
115 volts
120 volts
208 volts
220 volts
240 volts
Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

7.4 amperes
7.4 amperes
7.4 amperes
3.7 amperes
3.7 amperes
3.7 amperes
7.0 amperes
7.0 amperes
7.0 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.5 amperes
60±0.5 Hz
1.25
1
15 amperes

Physical characteristics
Programming support
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
635 millimeters (25 in.)
68.1 kg (150 lb)
90.9 kg (200 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
Model 2CA/3CA
500 watts (1730 BTU)
Model 2CB/3CB
400 watts (1365 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

4-14

IBM Series/1 Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
The 4967 high-performance Disk Subsystem
Attachment is required for each subsystem in aprocessor unit or expansion unit (feature 3595
for 2CA and feature 3596 for 3CA).

4967 High-Performance Disk Subsystem
Highlights include:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Storage capacity of 200 to 1432 megabytes
per subsystem (1 - 4 disk units)
Cache storage of 384KB per subsystem
Instantaneous data rate of 1.5 megabytes
per second
Average access time of 25 milliseconds
Extensive error checking and recovery
procedures
Selectable as IPL device.

The 4967 High Performance Disk Subsystemprovides the Series/1 with direct access storage
capacities up to 1432 megabytes per subsystem.
Multiple subsystems may be attached to a
Series/I. The 4967 is a full-width unit designed
for mounting in the 4997 Rack Enclosure or
EIA standard 19-inch rack.
There are four models of the 4967 disk unit:••••

Model 2CA is a primary disk unit that
contains 200 megabytes of storage.
Model 2CB is an expansion unit that
contains 200 megabytes of storage.
Model 3CA is a primary disk unit that
contains 358 megabytes of storage.
Model 3CB is an expansion unit that
contains 358 megabytes of storage.

Performance improvements are application
dependent- test cases from a variety of
applications thought to be typical have shown
improvements in disk throughput ranging from
50% to above 200%. No guarantee of results
can be made, however. The microprocessor
monitors its own "hit ratio" and adjusts tooptimize performance. A least-recently-usedalgorithm eliminates inactive data from cacheas space for new data is required. This allows
the 4967 to dynamically adapt to changes in thejob stream. Applications that are truly random(test cases found none) or that are heavily
write-oriented may experience little or no
improvement from the cache function. Cache
functions are transparent to programming. In
such cases, the standard performanceparameters of 25 milliseconds average accesstime and 10.1 milliseconds latency are seen.
During a write operation, data is placed incache only after being written to the disk.
Further 4967 features include automatic retries
on soft error, automatic seek to alternate sector(always on same cylinder; eliminates seek toalternate track), automatic seek overlap withread or write. Error correction code (ECC)
mechanism correct the most common form of
disk read errors and detect all uncorrectable
forms.

The Model 2CA primary disk unit requires the4967 Attachment (feature #3595), and can haveup to three 2CB expansion units. The Model
3CA primary disk unit requires the 4967
Attachment (feature #3596), and can have up to
three 3CB expansion units.
The 384K-byte cache ismicroprocessor-controlled and has the potential
to significantly improve system performance.
Selected data sectors, determined by the cachecontrol algorithm to be probable candidates for
system read requests, are pre-fetched and storedin cache. Cache functions are transparent toprogrammmg.

111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111I

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-15

4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape Unit specifications
Operating characteristics
Normal tape speed

Normal rewind time
Recording mode
Head type
Number of tracks

635 millimeters (25 in.)per second
1270 millimeters (50 in.)per second
2540 millimeters (100 in.)per second
2.6 minutes (2400 footreel)
IBM/ANSI compatible
Duel gap
9

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightShipping weight

222 millimeters (8.75 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
559 millimeters (22 in.)
36 kg (80 Ib)
38.6 kg (85 Ib)

Power requirements (at full load)
115 volts
208 volts
220 volts
240 volts

1.7 amperes
1 ampere
0.9 ampere
0.8 ampere

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.2
1
15 amperes

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Magnetic tape
IBM Multi-system tape.

Prerequisites
Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
180 watts (614 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
16 - 32.6°C (60 - 90°F)
Operating humidity
20 - 85 %4-16

IBM Series/! Digest

The 4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape
Unit attachment (feature 1220) is required foreach tape unit.

4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape Unit
The 4968 has the following key parameters ofsave/restore:

Highlights include:•

Fast, convenient, save/restore formedium-to-Iarge Series/I disk products.

•

Autoload convenience for standard tapereels.

•

Fast, streaming operation of 160KB per
second at 100 inches per second (1600 bpi
ANSI standard) or 50 inches per second(3200 bpi).

•

Reel capacity of 2400-foot reel is up to 80
megabytes at 3200 bpi.

•

Start/stop at up to 25 ips (1600 bpi) for
limited applications.

•

Dual density.

The 4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape
Units are designed for mounting in the 4997
Rack Enclosure Model 2 or EIA standard
19-inch rack. The unit is slide-mounted tofacilitate moving the unit into the service
position or into position for customer tape pathcleaning.
The tape unit attaches to the Series/I through atape attachment feature (feature 1220), which
can be plugged into either a processor or an I/O
expansion unit.

Speed
In streaming mode at 50 or 100 ips, the data
rate is 160K bytes per second. The 4968 saves
80 megabytes in approximately 10 minutes; 200
megabytes in approximately 30 minutes.
Software is designed to ensure streaming on aquiescent system in a save operation.

CapacityIn the 3200 bpi mode, each 2400 foot tape reelhas a capacity of approximately 80 megabytes.
A full 200 megabytes can be saved on threereels. At 1600 bpi, tape capacity isapproximately 40 megabytes.

Convenience
Autoloading eliminates tape threading by theoperator. Autoloading, plus large per reel tapecapacity, make operator convenience a key 4968
highlight. The au toload mechanism features
self-seating, self-locking tape hub and tape reelupside-down detect. Software support forsave/restore operations minimize operator
intervention on single or multi-reel operations.

The primary purpose of the 4968 Autoload
Streaming Magnetic Tape Unit is to provide
fast, convenient, save/restore functions for IBM
Series/I disk products.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-17

4201 Pro printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Programming support

Print speeds
DP quality••

200 characters per
secondText quality
100 characters per
secondCorrespondence
40 characters per
qualitysecondHorizontal spacing
5, 6, 8.5, 10, 12 and 17
characters per inch
Vertical line spacing 1/6, 1/8, N/144 inch
(converts N/216 to N /144
where applicable)
Print line length
203 millimeters (8 in.)Forms specifications
Thickness
Width
Continuous
Cut forms
Length (minimum)
Number of copies

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System (for theSeries/1 System Unit only).

Print Ribbon
Print cartridge P IN 6328829 or equivalent.

Prereq uisites
For the Series/1 System Unit (Note 1):••

Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter(feature 4900), or
Serial/Parallel Adapter (feature 0215).

0.003 - 0.014 inch

For the 4956 (Note 2):

3 - 10 inches
3 - 10 inches
3 inches
Original plus 3••

Serial Interface Card (feature 3000)
Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310), or•

Feature Programmable Multiline Controller(features 2095 and 2096).

Physical characteristics
CablesHeightWidth
Depth
Weight

134 millimeter s (5.25 in.)
406 millimeter s (16 in. )343 millimeter s (13.5 in.)7.94 kg (17.5 lb)

For the Series/1 System Unit:
Parallel Printer cable (feature 5612, P IN
1525612).

Environmental con d itions
For the 4956:
Heat output/hour
60 watts (205 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%••Communications Adapter cable (feature2056), andCommunications cable (P/N 5640736).

Notes:

P ower requirements (at full load)
100 volts
120 volts
240 volts

1.8 amperes
1.5 amperes
0.75 amper e

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.18
1
15 amperes

4-18

IBM Series/! Di gest

1.

The Proprinter can be connected to theTerminal/Host Attachment card as an
asynchronous device. The Se rial Printercable (feature 6031 , P IN 8509386) and theSerial Interface Card (feature 3000, P IN
6493187) are required.

2.

Xon/ Xoff pacing must be used . Fo r feature
1310, only baud rates up to 4800 bps may beused.

4201 ProprinterHighlights include:•

Compact, lightweight, tabletop printer•Bidirectional printing at a maximum of 200
characters per second•

Choice of three print qualities:
DP printing at 200 characters per
secondText (double-dotted) printing at a
maximum of 100 characters per second
Correspondence (double-struck) printing
at 40 characters per second•

IBM Personal Computer character sets 1
and 2

•

Printing at 5, 6, 8.5 , 10, 12, and 17
characters per inch•

Single-sheet or fanfold paper may be used•

An original plus three carbons can be made•80 characters per line in normal mode•

137 characters per line in compressed mode.

The 4201 is a compact, tabletop, bidirectional,
matrix printer. This serial printer provides
data processing (DP) printing, text printing, andcorrespondence quality printing.
The 4201 Proprinter is a customer-setup unitthat allows the user to install or relocate theprinter.
A 5KB print buffer (feature 4000) and a SerialInterface Card (feature 3000) are optionalfeatures available on the 4201.
For attachment to the Series/1 System Unit, a
1.8 meter (6 foot) Communications Adapter
Cable (feature 5612) is available for attachment
to the Monochrome Display and Printer
Adapter (feature 4900). A second 4201 may be
attached to the Serial/Parallel Adapter Card(feature 0215).
For attachment to an IBM 4956, the SerialInterface Card (feature 3000) must be ordered.
Also, a Communications Adapter Cable (feature2056) is is used with Communications Cable(PIN 5640736) to attach to the Mu ltifunction
Attachment (feature 1310) or to the Feature
Programmable Multiline Controller (features
2095 and 2096).

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-194202 Proprinter XL specifications
Operating characteristics

Programming support

Print speeds
DP quality••

200 characters per
secondText quality
100 characters per
secondCorrespondence
40 characters per
qualitysecondHorizontal spacing
5, 6, 8.5, 10, 12 and 17
characters per inch
Vertical line spacing 1/6, 1/8, N/144 inch
(converts N/216 to N/144
where applicable)
Print line length
335 millimeters (13.6 in.)

Print Ribbon
Print cartridge P IN 1040150 or equivalent.
Prerequisites
For the Series/1 System Unit (Note 1):••

Forms specifications•
Thickness
Width
Continuous
Cut forms
Length (minimum)
Number of copies

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System (for theSeries/1 System Unit only).

Serial Interface Card (feature 3000)
Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter(feature 4900), or
Serial/Parallel Adapter (feature 0215).

0.003 - 0.014 inch
For the 4956 (Note 2):
3 - 15 inches
3 - 16.5 inches
3 inches
Original plus 3•

Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310), or•

Feature Programmable Multiline Controller(features 2095 and 2096).

Physic a l characteristics
CablesHeightWidth
Depth
Weight

140 millimeters (5.5 in.)
574 millimeters (22.6 in.)
368 millimeters (14.5 in.)10.9 kg (24 lb)

For the Series/1 System Unit:
Parallel Printer cable (feature 5612, PIN
1525612).

En viron m ent al c on ditions
For the 4956:
Heat output/hour
60 watts (205 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%••Communications Adapter cable (feature2056), andCommunications cable (P /N 5640736).

Notes:
Po wer requ irements (at full load)

1.
100 volts
120 volts
240 volts

1.8 amperes
1.5 amperes
0.75 ampere

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.18
1
15 amperes

2.

The Proprinter XL can be connected to theTerminal/Host Attachment card as an
asynchronous device. The Serial Printercable (feature 6031, PIN 8509386) and theSerial Interface Card (feature 3000, PIN
6493187) are required.
Xon / Xoff pacing must be used. For feature
1310, only baud rates up to 4800 bps may be

used.

4-20

IBM Series/I Digest

4202 Proprin ter XL
Highlights include:•

Compact, lightweight, tabletop printer•Wide-carriage (13.6 inch print line)•

132 characters per line in normal mode•

214 characters per line in compressed mode•

4KB print buffer standard•

8KB print buffer option•

Bidirectional printing at a maximum of 200
characters per second•

Easy to use operator panel with expanded
function•

Increased character set size fordownloadable fonts•"Quiet" mode•

Power-assisted paper loading•

Choice of three print qualities:

The 4202 is a wide-carriage bidirectional
dot-matrix printer. This serial printer provides
data processing (DP) printing, text printing, andcorrespondence quality printing.
The 4202 Proprinter is a customer-setup unitthat allows the user to install or r elocate theprinter.
An 8KB print buffer (feature 4000) and a SerialInterface Card (feature 3000) are optionalfeatures available on the 4202.
For attachment to an IBM Series/I System
Unit, a 1.8 meter (6 foot) Communications
Adapter Cable (feature 5612) is availabl e forattachment to the Monochrome Display and
Printer Adapter (feature 4900). A second 4202
may be attached to the Serial/Parallel Adapter
Card (feature 0215).
For attachment to an IBM 4956, the SerialInterface Card (feature 3000) must be ordered.
Also, a Communications Adapter Cable (feature2056) is is used with Communications Cable(P/N 5640736) to attach to the Multifunction
Attachment (feature 1310) or to the Feature
Programmable Multiline Controller (features
2095 and 2096).

DP printing at 200 characters per
secondText (double-dotted) printing at a
maximum of 100 characters per second
Correspondence (double-struck) printing
at 40 characters per second•

IBM Personal Computer character sets 1
and 2

•

Printing at 5, 6, 8.5, 10, 12, and 17
characters per inch•

Single-sheet or fanfold paper may be used•

An original plus three carbons can be made•Proportional character spacing•

Software-selectable margins.

Chapter 4. Series/! input/output and system support units

4-21

4224 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)Print speeds
Model 301

110 volts
220 volts

3 amperes
1.5 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.33
1
15 amperes

200 characters per
secondModel 302
400 characters per
secondModel3C2
400 characters per
secondHorizontal spacing
10, 12 or 15 characters
per inch
Vertical line spacing 6 or 8 lines per inch
Characters per print line
10 characters per inch 132 characters
12 characters per inch 158 characters
15 characters per inch 198 characters

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System (RS-422-A
only).

Print Ribbon
Forms specifications
Type of forms
Thickness
Width
LengthNumber of copies

Continuous
0.003 - 0.025 inch
3 - 15 inches
3 - 14 inches
Original plus 5

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight

280 millimeters (11 in.)
710 millimeters (28 in.)
580 millimeters (23 in.)
68 kg (149 lb)

Models 301 and 302
B/W
Model3C2
B/W
4 color8 colorP IN 6091649
P IN 6115549
P IN 6115555
P IN 6115554

Prerequisites (see note)•

Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310), or•

F eature Programmable Multiline Controller(features 2095 and 2096).

Environmental conditions

CablesHeat output/hour
330 watts (1130 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%•••Feature 5770, or
Feature 5790, orCommunications Adapter cable (feature2056), and Communications cable (P/N
5640736).

Note: Xon/Xoff pacing must be used.

4-22

IBM Series/! Digest

4224 PrinterThe 4224 is a tabletop wire-matrix printer that
produces characters printed by a pattern ofdots, and provides medium-speed output for theSeries/l.

Highlights include:•

Printing up to six-part forms•

Vertical spacing at 6 to 8 lines per inch•

Local attachment via RS-232-C or RS-422-A
interface.

•

Local attachment up to 1219 meters (4000
feet)

•

Three models with a maximum speed of up
to 400 characters per second•

Printing at 10 characters per inch (132characters per line) ,12 characters per inch
(158 characters per line), or 15 characters
per inch (198 characters per line)•

Bidirectional printing for optimized
throughput•

Prints in Data Processing (DP)? Data
Processing Text (DPT), or Near Letter
Quality (NLQ) modes•

Choice of four-color or eight-color ribbons
on Model 3C2.

The printer meets the needs for a system printeror a work station printer_ The 4224 is acustomer-setup unit, which allows the user toeasily install or relocate the printer.
The 4224 attaches to the Series/I by either
Feature 1310 or Features 2095 and 2096.
The printer accepts single-part continuous
forms or multipart continuous forms .

f '-Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-23

4234 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)Print speeds
Near letter quality
120 Lines per minute
Data processing print 300 lines per minuteDraft print
410 lines per minuteHorizontal spacing
10 or 15 characters perinch
Vertical line spacing 3, 4, 6, or 8 lines per inch
Characters per printline

100-110 volts
120-127 volts200-220 volts

9.0 amperes
7.5 amperes
4.5 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60±0.5 Hz
0.9
1

15 amperes

Programming support
132 characters at 10 cpi
198 characters at 15 cpi

Event Driven Executive (must be defined as a5225).

Forms specifications
Print Ribbon
Thickness
Single-partMultipart
Width
LengthNumber of copies

0 - 0.009 inch
0 - 0.02 inch
3.5 - 16 inches
3 - 14 inches
Original plus 5

P IN 6295158
Prerequisites
Printer attachment- 5200 Series (feature 5640) is
required.

Physical characteristics
CablesHeightWidth
Depth
Weight958 millimeters (37.8 in.)
660 millimeters (26 in.)
765 millimeters (30.3 in.)
68.1 kg (150 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
700 watts (2387 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-24

IBM Series/1 Digest

Feature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet).

4234 PrinterThe 4234 is a heavy-duty impact-matrix line
printer that provides medium-speed output anduses dot-print band technology.

The printer meets the needs for a system printeror a work station printer. The 4234 is acustomer-setup unit, which allows the user toeasily install or relocate the printer.

Highlights include:•

A selection of three dot sizes•

selection of three densities of print andprint speeds•

300 lines per minute (nominal)•

Horizontal spacing of 10 and 15 characters
per inch•

Vertical spacing of 3, 4, 6, and 8 lines perinch•

Prints up to 6-part forms•

Forms eject and restore for tearing off forms
and continuing•

Operator-selectable character sets•End-of-forms detection•

Variable-width form feed tractors•

Horizontal and vertical vernier-adjustments•

Power-assist when loading forms•

Audible alarm•

Alphameric Status display•

Printer stand•Low noise level (approximately 57 dB)•

Forms stacker.

The 4234 attaches to the Series/I by means of
the IBM Printer Attachment-5200 Series(feature 5640), which can be plugged into either
the processor or the I/O expansion unit. Print
operations, controlled by a microprocessor
located in the attachment feature, are bufferedand operate in cycle-steal mode.
The printer accepts single-part continu ous
forms or multipart continuous forms.
Integrated operator controls move and adjust
the forms.

- - .".,

I--------Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-25

4975 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

P o wer requirements (at full loa d )Print speeds
Models OlA, OIL, OlR 80 characters per second
Models 02L, 02R
40 or 160 characters per
secondHorizontal spacing
10 or 15 characters perinch
Vertical line spacing 6 or 8 lines per inch
Characters per print line
10 characters per inch 132 characters
15 characters per inch 198 characters

Models OIA, OIL, OIR
115 volts
0.61 ampere
208 volts
0.34 ampere
230 volts
0.3 ampere

Forms specifications
Thickness
Single-partMultipart
Width
LengthNumber of copies

0.003 - 0.0075 inch
0.003 - 0.018 inch
3 -14.5 inches
3 - 14 inches
Original plus 3

Physical ch aracteristics
Height
221 millimeters (8.7 in.)Width
580 millimeters (20.8 in.)Depth
420 millimeters (16.5 in.)
WeightModels OlA, OIL, OlR
26.3 kg (58 lb)
29.9 kg (66 lb)
Models 02L, 02R

Models 02L, 02R
115 volts
208 volts
230 volts

0.67 ampere
0.37 ampere
0.34 ampere

Frequency
60±0.5 Hz
kVA
Models OlA, OIL, OlR 0.07
Models 02L, 02R
0.08
Phase
1
15 amperes
Branch circuit
Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prin t Ribbon
Models OlA, OIL, OlR PIN 7034535 orequivalentModels 02L, 02R
P /N 7032555 orequivalent
Prerequ is ites

Environmental conditions
Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310)
Heat output/hour
Models OlA, OIL, OlR 125 watts (426 BTU)
175 watts (597 BTU)
Models 02L, 02R
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature 10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

CablesEach printer comes equipped with a 2.8-meter(9-foot) power cable with non locking plug.
To connect Models OIL and 02L to theMultifunction Attachment RS-422-A ports, theMultifunction Attachment cable (feature 5770)
is available as a l5.4-meter (50-foot) cable withappropriate connectors.
To connect Models OlA, OlR, and 02R, theAsynchronous Local Attachment cable (feature2056) or the EIA dataset cable (feature 2057) isavailable. Both cables are 6.1 meters (20 feet)
long.

4-26

IBM Series/! Digest

4975 PrinterHighlights include:
•

•
•

•

•
•

•
•

Allows either local attachment up to 1219.2
meters (4000 feet) from a Series/1 processor,
remote attachment to Series/I, or as an
auxiliary ASCII printer attached to theasynchronous port of a Display Terminal.
Requires no additional programming for
remote attachment
Models OIL, aIR and alA:
- Operate at 80 characters per second- Print in draft mode
Models 02L and 02R:
Operate at 40 and 160 characters per
second (cps)Print in quality mode (40 cps) and draftmode (160 cps)
Provides bidirectional printing
Either prints 10 characters per inch, up to
132 characters per line, or 15 characters perinch, up to 198 characters per line
Prints six or eight lines per inch underprogram control
Prints up to four-part forms.

The 4975 Printer is a tabletop, serial-impact,
wire-matrix printer that produces characters
printed by a pattern of dots, and provides
low-speed output for the Series/I. The printermeets the system needs for a small systemprinter, a work station printer, or a remoteprinter. The 4975 is a customer-setup unit,
which allows the user to easily install or
relocate the printer.
All models print in draft mode. Models 02L and
02R print in quality mode. Quality printing isbest suited for cut forms . Software controls theprinting of correspondence quality documents.
The software instructs the printer to perform
additional functions such as proportionals pacing and multiple pass printing of each line,
which results in higher quality printed output
suitable for letters.

Two interfaces are available. The RS-422-A
interface, for Models OIL and 02L, allows local
use; the maximum local distance allowed is1219.2 meters (4000 feet) from a Series/1
processor. The RS-232-C interface, for Models
aIR and 02R, allows remote use; no additional
programming is required for remote attachment.
Model alA uses the RS-232-C interface.
The printer accepts single-part continuous
forms, multipart continuou s forms, and cut
forms. A forms tractor, with chain-drive paper
feed, is provided for printing on
margin-punched continu ous forms.
Integrated operator controls move and adjust
the paper or forms. An optional Rear
Document Insertion Device (feature 6100)
allows the user to conveniently feed cut sheets
and cut forms. For optimum handling ofcontinuous forms , the Forms Stand (feature4450) is recommended.

Special printing cartridge
This optional feature on the 4975 Model 2
provides a computer-based system that offers
the versatility of bar code, OCR, and large
character label printing. Applications include
retail sales, stock inventory, manufacturingparts and assembly checking, plus
miscellaneous identification needs in otherindustries or information systems.
The Special printing cartridge isoperator-insertable and replaces the standard
printing cartridge. Feature 1601 provides a
cartridge for already-installed 4975 Model 2
printers. Feature 1610 provides afactory-installed Special Printing Cartridge (nostandard cartridge is provided).

The 4975 attaches to the Series/1 by means of
the Multifunction Attachment (feature 1310),
which can be plugged into either the processor
or input/output expansion unit. Print
operations, controlled by a microprocessor
located in the attachment feature, are bufferedand operate in cycle-steal mode.

Chapter 4. Series/I input/output and system su pport units

4-27

5219 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)Print speeds
Model DOl
Model D02
Horizontal spacing

110 volts
208 volts
240 volts

5.0 amperes
2.6 amperes
2.3 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.55

40 characters per second
60 characters per second
10, 12, or 15 characters
per inchor proportional spacing
Vertical line spacing 4, 5.3, 6, 8, 9.6, or 12 lines
per inch
Print line length
335 millimeters (13.25 in.)1

15 amperes

Programming support
Forms specifications
Thickness
Single-partMultipart
Width
LengthNumber of copies••
0.003 - 0.0075 inch
0.003 - 0.018 inch
3 - 14.5 inches
3 - 14 inches
Original plus 5

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Print Ribbon
IBM Tech III or equivalent
Prerequisites

Physical characteristics
Printer only
Height
200 millimeters (7.9 in.)Width
660 millimeters (26 in.)Depth
583 millimeters (23 in.)
Weight31 kg (68.2 lb)
Printer with sheet feed option
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight

484 millimeters (19 in.)
660 millimeters (26 in.)
725 millimeters (28.5 in.)
43 kg (94.6 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
100 watts (341 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
15.6 - 32.2°C (60 - 9Q°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-28

IBM Series/1 Digest

Printer attachment- 52oo Series (feature 5640) is
required.
CablesFeature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet).

5219 PrinterHighlights include:•

Operates in data stream or 4975 emulationmode•

In data stream mode:
10, 12, 15-pitch, or proportional spacing
4, 5.3, 6, 8, 9.6, or 12 lines-per-inch•

In 4975 emulation mode:
10 or 15-pitch
6 or 8 lines-per-inch•

From single to triple line spacing•

Reverse indexing•

Connects to system with twinaxial cable up
to 1524 meters (5000 feet).

•Control panel displays that communicate tooperator•

Control panel pushbuttons that allow
operator control and communication.

•

Semi-automatic paper insertion andalignment•

Economy ribbon saver used for draft quality
printing•

Cable-thru feature provides for multidrop of
up to eight 5219s•

Interchangeable 96-character printwheelsthat allow type font changes•

Print ribbon cartridges for easy replacement•

Uses cut sheet feed (feature 7860) or
continuous forms feed (feature 7850)•

Paper stand (feature 4450) available for use
with tractor feed.

The 5219 is a tabletop printer that provides
word processing print quality. There are twomodels that differ only in speed.

Burst speed
Net speed
Tab speed
Maximum paper
width
Writing line width

Model DOl
40cps
26cps
150 mm/sec
392mm

Model D02
60cps
38cps
600 mm/sec
392mm

335 mm

335 mmThe 5219 is a customer-setup unit, which allows
the user to easily install or relocate the printer.
The 5219 attaches to the Ser ies/1 by means of
the Printer Attachment-5200 Series (feature5640), which can be plugged into the processor
or an I/O expansion u nit. Print operations,controlled by a microprocessor located in theattachment feature, are buffered and operate incycle-steal mode.

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-29

5224 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)Print speeds (based on a 7.4-inch nominal line)
Modell (10 cpi)
140 lines per minute
Modell (15 cpi)
95 lines per minute
Model 2 (10 cpi)
240 lines per minute
Model 2 (15 cpi)
175 lines per minuteHorizontal spacing
10 or 15 characters perinch
Vertical line spacing 6 or 8 lines per inch
Characters per print line
10 characters per inch 132 characters
15 characters per inch 198 characters

120 volts
208 volts
240 volts

2.6 amperes
1.5 amperes
1.2 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.3
1
15 amperes••

Forms specifications
Thickness
Single-partMultipart
Width
LengthNumber of copies

280 millimeters (11 in.)
710 millimeters (28 in.)
580 millimeters (23 in.)
68 kg (149 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
550 watts (1880 BTU)
ModellModel 2600 watts (2050 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-30

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Print Ribbon
0.003 - 0.0075 inch
0.0025 - 0.018 inch
3 - 17.7 inches
3 - 12.5 inches
Original plus 3

Physical characteristics
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightProgramming support

IBM Series/1 Digest

P IN 6845100 or equivalent

Prerequisites
Printer attachment- 5200 Series (feature 5640) is
required.

CablesFeature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet) .

5224 PrinterThe 5224 is a tabletop line-impact wire-matrix
printer that produces characters printed by apattern of dots, and provides medium-speed
output for the Series/I.

The printer meets the needs for a system printeror a work station printer. The 5224 is acustomer-setup unit, which allows the user toeasily install or relocate the printer.

The 5224 Line Printer provides:

The 5224 attaches to the Series/1 by means of
the Printer Attachment-5200 Series (feature5640), which can be plugged into either theprocessor or the I /O expansion unit. Print
operations, con trolled by a microprocessor
located in the attachment feature, are bufferedand operate in cycle-steal mode.

•

Printing up to four-part forms•

Vertical spacing at 6 to 8 lines per inch•

Local attachment up to 1524 meters (5000
feet)

•

Two models with a maximum speed of 140 or
240 lines per minute•Printing at 10 characters per inch (132characters per line) or 15 characters perinch (198 characters per line)•

Bidirectional printing for optimized
throughput.

The printer accepts single-part continuous
forms or multipart continuous forms.
Integrated operator controls move and adjust
the forms.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-31

5225 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)Print speeds (based on a 7.4-inch nominal line)
Modell (10 cpi)
280 lines per minute
Modell (15 cpi)
195 lines per minute
Model 2 (10 cpi)
400 lines per minute
Model 2 (15 cpi)
290 lines per minute
Model 3 (10 cpi)
490 lines per minute
Model 3 (15 cpi)
355 lines per minute
Model 4 (10 cpi)
560 lines per minute
Model 4 (15 cpi)
420 lines per minuteHorizontal spacing
10 or 15 characters perinch
Vertical line spacing 6 or 8 lines per inch
Characters per print line
10 characters per inch 132 characters
15 characters per inch 198 characters

Modell
110 volts
208 volts
240 volts
Model 2110 volts
208 volts
240 volts
Model 3110 volts
208 volts
240 volts
Model 4110 volts
208 volts
240 volts

5.3 amperes
2.8 amperes
2.5 amperes
6.4 amperes
3.5 amperes
3.0 amperes
6.8 amperes
3.6 amperes
3.1 amperes
8.2 amperes
4.3 amperes
3.8 amperes

Forms specifications
Thickness
Single-partMultipart
Width
LengthNumber of copies

0.003 - 0.0075 inch
0.0025 - 0.018 inch
3 - 17.7 inches
3 - 12.5 inches
Original plus 3

FrequencykVA
ModellModel 2Model 3Model 4Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.6
0.72
0.75
0.9
I

15 amperes

Physical characteristics
Programming support
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight1000 millimeters (39.5 in.)1110 millimeters (43.75
in.)
750 millimeters (29.5 in.)250 kg (550 lb)••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Print Ribbon

Environmental conditions

PIN 4412372 or equivalentHeat output/hour
Modell750 watts (2562 BTU)
800 watts (2733 BTU)
Model 2900 watts (3074 BTU)
Model 31000 watts (3416 BTU)
Model 4
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%Prerequisites

4-32

IBM Series/1 Digest

Printer attachment- 5200 Series (feature 5640) is
required.

CablesFeature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet).

5225 PrinterThe 5225 printer is a line-impact wire-matrix
printer that produces characters printed by apattern of dots, and provides high-speed output
for the Series/I.

The printer meets the needs for a system printeror a work station printer. The 5225 is acustomer-setup unit, which allows the user toeasily install or relocate the printer.

The 5225 Line Printer:

The 5225 attaches to the Series/l by means of
the IBM Printer Attachment-5200 Series(feature 5640), which can be plugged into either
the processor or the I/O expansion unit. Print
operations, controlled by a microprocessor
located in the attachment feature , are bufferedand operate in cycle-steal mode.

•

Prints up to four-part forms•

Vertical spacing at 6 or 8 lines per inch•

Local attachment up to 1525 meters (5000
feet)

•

Four models with a maximum speed of 280
to 560 lines per minute•Prints 10 characters per inch (132characters per line) or 15 characters perinch (198 characters per line)•

Bidirectional printing for optimized
throughput.

The printer accepts single-part continuous
forms or multipart continuous forms.
Integrated operator controls move and adjust
the forms.

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-33

5262 Printer specifications
Operating characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)Print speed

100 volts
no volts
120 volts
127 volts

1.2 amperes
1.2 amperes
1.2 amperes
1.2 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
1.2 (maximum)
1
15 amperes

650 lines per minute with
48 character set
Horizontal spacing
10 characters per inch
Vertical line spacing 6 or 8 lines per inch
Characters per printline
132 characters at 10 cpi

Forms specifications
Thickness
Single-partMultipart
Width
LengthN urn ber of copies

0 - 0.009 inch
0-0.02 inch
3.5 - 16 inches
6 - 14 inches
Original plus 5

Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Print Ribbon
Physical characteristics
P IN 7819690 or equivalent
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight1000 millimeters (39.5 in.)
965 millimeters (38 in.)
750 millimeters (29.5 in.)246 kg (540 lb) 'Prerequisites
Printer attachment- 5200 Series (feature 5640) is
required.

Environmental conditions
CablesHeat output/hour
noo watts (3750 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-34

IBM Series/1 Digest

Feature 5780, 6.1 meters (20 feet).

5262 PrinterThe 5262 is a print-band line printer providing
high-speed output for the Series/l.
The 5262 line printer provides:•

Printing up to six-part forms•

Vertical spacing at 6 or 8 lines per inch•

Local attachment up to 1525 meters (5000
feet)

•

650 line-per-minute output using a
48-character print belt•

10 characters per inch (132 characters perline).

The printer meets the needs for a system printeror a work station printer. The 5262 is acustomer-setup unit, which allows the user toeasily install or relocate the printer.
The 5262 attaches to the Series/I by means of
the IBM Printer Attachment-5200 Series(feature 5640), which can be plugged into either
the processor or the I/O expansion unit. Print
operations, controlled by a microprocessor
located in the attachment feature, are bufferedand operate in cycle-steal mode.
The printer accepts single-part continuous
forms or multipart continuous forms.
Integrated operator controls move and adjust
the forms.

•

Chapter 4. Series/ l input/output and system support units

4-35

3161 and 3163 ASCII Display Station specifications
Display characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Diagonal measurementof Cathode-ray tube
305 millimeters (12 in.)
Character capacity
1920 characters
Format24 rows x 80 characters

120 volts

0.9 amperes (average)

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60±0.5 Hz
0.18
115 amperes

Physical characteristics
Video element
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightProgramming support
330 millimeters (13 in.)
310 millimeters (12.2 in.)
307 millimeters (12.1 in.)8.2 kg (18 lb)••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
Logic element
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight70 millimeters (2.8 in.)
345 millimeters (13.6 in.)
315 millimeters (12.4 in.)
2.2 kg (4.8 lb)

Keyboard
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight40 millimeters. (lo6 in.)
492 millimeters (19.4 in.)
210 millimeters (8.3 in.)2.5 kg (5.5 lb)

For attachment to a series/1 processor or an
expansion unit, one of the following is required:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
55 watts (188 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%Feature 1310, RS-232-C and RS-422-A
interface
Feature 1610, RS-232-C interface
Features 2091 and 2092, RS-232-C interface
Features 2095 and 2096, RS-232-C interface
Features 2095 and D02350, RS-422-A
interface
Feature 7850, RS-232-C interface (notintended for use with modems).

For attachment to a 4987, one of the following
is required:•••Feature 4700, RS-232-C interface
Feature 4701, RS-232-C interface
Feature 4709, RS-232-C interface (notintended for use with modems).

Cables•••4-36

IBM Series/1 Digest

Power supply, keyboard, and display cables
are provided
a 3-meter (10-foot) display cable is available
as an accessory
a 4-conductor cable (RPQ D02352) isavailable for attachment of the 316X Model
12 (RS-422-A interface) to the 3101 8-line
adapter (RPQ D02350).

3161 and 3163 ASCII Display Stations
Highlights include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

12-inch monochrome monitor
Green (Models 11 and 12) or amber (Models
21 and 22) screen
ASCII communications
RS-232-C for remote attachment
RS-422-A for local attachment up to 1219
meters (4000 feet)
Advanced screen and edit functions
3101, Model 881 (23) and six otheremulations.

The 3161 and 3163 ASCII Display Stations
operate through asynchronous communications
interfaces and use a 7- or 8-bit ASCII code.
Line speeds range from 50 to 19,200 bits per
second.
The 3161 is a offers such advanced functions asmenu setup, definable function keys, split
screen, and character and field attribute. The
operator may select a 3161 native mode, 3101
mode, or one of many non-IBM emulators.
The 3163 is an advanced editing display thatprovides multiple screen viewports, partitioning
and paging, redefinable keyboard withreplaceable function key tops, host-Ioadable
character set, block LRC check, advanced
editing field attributes, as well as many
advanced screen characteristics such as smooth
scrolling and double-high, double-wide
characters.
These displays attach to the Series/1 by meansof anyone of several adapter and attachment
cards. Models are selectable to provide
RS-422-A interface for local use attachment andRS-232-C interface for remote attachment. The
maximum local distance allowed for RS-422-A is1219 meters (4000 feet) from a Series/1
processor. Series/1 supports Models 11, 12, 21,
and 22 for both the 3161 and 3163.
ModelsMode

11, 21

Character, or EIA RS-232-C
block
Character, or EIA RS-232-C , or
block
EIA RS-422-A

12,22

Both the 3161 and 3163 consist of a video
element with a tilt and swivel pedestal, akeyboard element, and a logic element, in acompact design. The replaceable element
concept permits the user to set up the display
station, and perform problem analysis andresolution.

Video element
A high-quality, 12-inch, green or amberphosphor, anti-glare screen is used. The screen
format consists of 24 lines of 80 characters each(1920 characters total). The 25th line provides
indicators for operation information such assystem status and problem analysis results. A
stand that snaps onto the base of the video
element is provided and allows the display to betilted and swiveled. A CRT saver function isoffered.

Keyboard element
A 102-key, low-profile keyboard with numeric
keypad and cursor control keys provides tactile
feedback and selectable tilt angle. The
keyboard generates the 24 line-drawing
characters and the 128 ASCII characters.

Logic element
The video element rests on the logic element.
The keyboard and the video element eachconnect to the logic element by cable. An
auxiliary asynchronous interface allows
attachment of another ASCII device, such as
the 4201 Proprinter. On the 3163, this interface
is for both input and output.

Interface

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-37

3162 Display Station specifications
Display characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Diagonal measurementof Cathode-ray tube
356 millimeters (14 in.)
Character capacity
1920 characters
Format24 rows X 80 characters

120 volts

1.2 amperes (maximum)

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60 ± 0.5 Hz
0.14

P h ysical cha racteristics
Video element
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightLogic element
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightKeyboar d
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight1

15 amperes

P r ogra m ming s upport
322 millimeters (12.7 in.)
333 millimeters (13.1 in.)
339 millimeters (13.3 in.)7.6 kg (16.8 lb)
70 millimeters (2.8 in.)
345 millimeters (13.6 in.)
315 millimeters (15.9 in.)
2.2 kg (4.9 lb)
40 millimeters (1.6 in.)
492 millimeters (19.4 in.)
210 millimeters (8.3 in.)2.5 kg (5.5 lb)

Environmenta l conditions
Heat output/hour
55 watts (188 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 -105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Note: Menu-selectable character density is notsupported by Event Driven Executive orRealtime Programming System.
P r ereq u isites
For attachment to a series/1 processor or an
expansion unit, one of the following is required:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Feature 1310, RS-232-C and RS-422-A
interface
Feature 1610, RS-232-C interface
Features 2091 and 2092, RS-232-C interface
Features 2095 and 2096, RS-232-C interface
Features 2095 and D02350, RS-422-A
interface
Feature 7850, RS-232-C interface (notintended for use with modems).

For attachment to a 4987, one of the following
is required:•••Feature 4700, RS-232-C interface
Feature 4701, RS-232-C interface
Feature 4709, RS-232-C interface (notintended for use with modems).

Cables•••4-38

IBM Series/1 Digest

Power supply, keyboard, and display cables
are provided
a 3-meter (lO-foot) display cable is available
as an accessory
a 4-conductor cable (RPQ D02352) isavailable for attachment of the 316X Model
12 (RS-422-A interface) to the 3101 8-line
adapter (RPQ D02350).

3162 ASCII Display Station
Highlights include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

14-inch monochrome monitor
Green or amber screen
Menu-selectable character density
ASCII communications
RS-232-C for remote attachment
RS-422-A for local attachment up to 1219
meters (4000 feet)
Advanced screen and edit functions
3101, Model 881 (23) and six otheremulations.

The 3162 ASCII Display Station operates
through asynchronous communications
interfaces and uses a 7- or 8-bit ASCII code.
Line speeds range from 50 to 19,200 bits per
second. Models available are:
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Model 11, green display, RS-232-C interface
and numeric keypad
Model 12, green display, RS-232-C or
RS-422-A interface, and numeric keypad
Model 21 , amber display, RS-232-C interface
and numeric keypad
Model 22, amber display, RS-232-C or
RS-422-A interface, and numeric keypad
Model 31, green display, RS-232-C interface
and without numeric keypad
Model 32, green display, RS-232-C or
RS-422-A interface, and without numeric
keypadModel 41 , amber display, RS-232-C interface
and without numeric keypad
Model 42, amber display, RS-232-C or
RS-422-A interface, and without numeric
keypad.

It offers such advanced functions as menu
setup, definable function keys, split screen, andcharacter and field attribute. The operator may
select a 3162 native mode, 3101 mode, or one ofmany non-IBM emulators. The 3162 attaches to
the Series/1 by means of anyone of several
adapter and attachment cards. Models are
selectable to provide RS-422-A interface for
local use attachment and RS-232-C interface forremote attachment. The maximum local
distance allowed for RS-422-A is 1219 meters(4000 feet) from a Series/1 processor.

The 3162 consists of a video element, akeyboard element, and a logic element. The
replaceable element concept lets the user set up
the display station and perfor m problem
analysis and resolution.

Video element
A high-quality, 14-inch, green or amber,anti-glare screen is used. The menu-selectablescreen format consists of either:••••

24 lines of 80 characters (1920 characters)
28 lines of 80 characters (2240 characters)
24 lines of 132 characters (3168 characters)
28 lines of 132 characters (3696 characters).

An additional line on the bottom of the screen
provides indicators for operation information,such as system status. A tilt and swivel standand a CRT saver function are provided.

Keyboard element
Either an 84-key keyboard withou t numeric
keypad, or a 102-key keyboard with numeric
keypad and cursor control keys, provide tactile
feedback and selectable tilt angle. Bothkeyboards generate the 24 line-drawing
characters and the 128 ASCII characters.

Logic element
The video element rests on the logic element.
The keyboard and the video element connect tothe logic element by cable. An auxiliary
asynchronous interface allows attachment ofanother ASCII device, such as the 4201
Proprinter.

-

~

-..

~

Chapter 4. Series/ l input/output and system support units

4-39

3164 ASCII Color Display Station specifications
Display characteristics

Power requ irements (at full load )Diagonal measurementof Cathode-ray tube
356 millimeters (14 in.)
Character capacity
1920 characters
Format24 rows x 80 characters

120 volts

2.3 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

50/60 ±0.5 Hz
0.28
115 amperes

P hysical characteristics
Vid eo ele m en t
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightLogic element
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightKeyboard
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightP r ogram min g s upport
390 millimeters (15.4 in.)
380 millimeters (15 in.)
405 millimeters (15.9 in.)
14 kg (30.9 lb)••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prerequisites
70 millimeters (2.8 in.)
345 millimeters (13.6 in.)
315 millimeters (12.4 in.)
2.2 kg (4.8 lb)

For attachment to a series/1 processor or an
expansion unit, one of the following is required:•40 millimeters (1.6 in.)
492 millimeters (19.4 in.)
210 millimeters (8.3 in.)2.5 kg (5.5 lb)

•
•
•
•

Enviro nmental conditio ns•
Heat output/hour
100 watts (341 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%Feature 1310, RS-232-C and RS-422-A
interface
Feature 1610, RS-232-C interface
Features 2091 and 2092, RS-232-C interface
Features 2095 and 2096, RS-232-C interface
Features 2095 and D02350, RS-422-A
interface
Feature 7850, RS-232-C interface (notintended for use with modems).

For attachment to a 4987, one of the following
is required:•••Feature 4700, RS-232-C interface
Feature 4701, RS-232-C interface
Feature 4709, RS-232-C interface (notintended for use with modems).

Ca bles
•
•
•

4-40

IBM Series/l Digest

Power supply, keyboard, and display cables
are provided
a 3-meter (lO-foot) display cable is available
as an accessory
a 4-conductor cable (RPQ D02352) isavailable for attachment of the 316X Model
12 (RS-422-A interface) to the 3101 8-line
adapter (RPQ D02350).

3164 ASCII Color Display Station
Highlights include:

V ideo element

•
•
•
•
•

A high-quality, 14-inch, color screen is used.
Images can be displayed in eight colors (red,green, blue, yellow, magenta, turquoise, black,and white). The screen format consists of 24lines of 80 characters each (1920 characters
total). A 25th line provides indicators for
operation information, such as system status
and problem analysis results. A stand thatsnaps onto the base of the video element isprovided and allows the display to be tilted andswiveled. A CRT saver function is offered.

••

14-inch color monitor
Eight color foreground/background
ASCII communications
RS-232-C for remote attachment
RS-422-A for local attachment up to 1219
meters (4000 feet)
Advanced screen and edit functions
3101 emulation.

The IBM 3164 is a high-function, ASCII display
station of the IBM 316X family which offers
such features as menu set-up, definable function
keys, split-screen, and character and field
attributes. It also has functions such as smooth
scroll, windowing, paging, redefinable keys,
double-size characters, and is compatible with
the IBM 3163.
The 3164 ASCII Display Station is a keyboard
display that operates through asynchronous
communications interfaces and uses a 7-bit oran 8-bit ASCII code. Line speeds range from 50
to 19,200 bits per second.
The 3164 attaches to the Series/1 by means ofanyone of several adapter and attachment
cards, that can be plugged into either theprocessor or input/output expansion unit.
Models are selectable to provide RS-422-A
interface for local use attachment and RS-232-C
interface for remote attachment. The maximum
local distance allowed for RS-422-A is 1219
meters (4000 feet) from a Series/1 processor.
Series/1 supports a Model 11 and 12 for the
3164.

Model

Mode

Interface

11

Character, or
block
Character, or
block

EIA RS-232-C

12

Keyboard element
A 102-key, low-profile keyboard with numeric
keypad and cursor control keys provides tactile
feedback and selectable tilt angle. The
keyboard generates the 24 line-drawing
characters and the 128 ASCII characters.

Logic element
The video element rests on the logic element.
The keyboard and the video element eachconnect to the logic element by cable. An
auxiliary asynchronous interface allows
attachment of another ASCII device, such as
the 4201 Proprinter. This interface is for both
input and output.

EIA RS-232-C, or
EIA RS-422-A

The 3164 consists of a video element with a tilt
and swivel pedestal, a keyboard element, and alogic element, in a compact design. The
replaceable element concept permits the user to
set up the display station, and perform problem
analysis and resolution.

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-41

4978 Display Station specifications
Display characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

Diagonal measurementof Cathode-ray tube
305 millimeters (12 in.)
Character capacity
1920 characters
Format24 rows x 80 characters
Format area
Height
152 millimeters (6 in.)
229 millimeters (9 in.)Width

115 volts
208 volts
230 volts

1 ampere
0.5 ampere
0.5 ampere

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.08
1
15 amperes

Physical characteristics
Programming support
Display
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightKeyboard
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight

298 millimeters (15.3 in.),or
356 millimeters (14 in.)
476 millimeters (18.75 in.)
325 millimeters (12.8 in.)21.4 kg (52 lb)
100 millimeters (3.9 in.)
532 millimeters (20.9 in.)
250 millimeters (9.8 in.)7.1 kg (15.5 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
116 watts (399 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%4-42

IBM Series/1 Digest••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prereq uisites
The 4978 Display Station Attachment (RPQ
D02038) is required.

CablesEither RPQ or accessory bill-of-material cables
can be ordered to attach 4978s up to 150 meters(500 feet) .
•••Keyboard cable is provided
RPQ D02034 provides a 6.1-meter (20-foot)attachment cable
RPQ D02032 provides a 3-meter (10-foot)cable increment.

4978 Display Station
Highlights include:
•
•
•
•
•

User-defined keyboard characters, function
codes, and display character graphics
Typematic keys
Cycle-steal operations and bufferedmicroprocessor control
24 lines of data, 80 characters per line
High-density characters to highlight
operator entries.

The 4978 Display Station is an interactive
information display device with charactergraphics. It comes in two models and has achoice of keyboards. A tabletop unit, the 4978
allows local input, operator intervention, andkeyboard editing. It attaches to a Series/l bymeans of the 4978 Display Attachment Feature(RPQ D02038), which can be plugged into either
a processor unit or an I /O expansion unit.
Display and keyboard operations are controlled
by a microprocessor in the 4978 attachment
feature, and operate in cycle-steal mode.

An audible cursor alarm (RPQ D02060) provides
an audible tone to alert an operator to an
exception condition that has occurred during
4978 operation.
The Monitor Attachment (RPQ D02222)
provides attachment of one or morecustomer-supplied video monitors. This
attachment drives the video monitors, which
duplicate the display image being produced by
the 4978. The video monitors can be located up
to 153 meters (500 feet) from the attachment
point without signal amplification.

Keyboard
Keyboard characters, function codes, anddisplay-character graphics may be user-definedand loaded into the attachment from processor
storage. Key position codes may be assigned asinterrupting program keys, interrupting data
keys, data entry keys, or local function keys.
Several keyboards, which support a variety of
application needs, are available for the 4978:

Display screen (RPQ D02055)
The 4978 can display a maximum of 24
eighty-character lines of data. All display data
is buffered, and the display is refreshed(regenerated) continuously from the buffer tomaintain a constant, easy-to-read display undernormal lighting conditions. The Model 2functions are identical to the ModelL The
differences are that the Model 2 display unit issmaller and has two base sizes. Even though
the display unit is smaller, the screen remains
305 millimeters (12 inches), measured
diagonally.

Keyboard Extended (RPQ D02056)
Keyboard Basic (RPQ D02057)
Keyboard DAS/C 2-Meter (RPQ D02064)
Keyboard DAS/C I-Meter (RPQ D02065)
Keyboard - Data Entry (large) (RPQ D02275)
Keyboard - Data Entry (small) (RPQ D02276)
Keyboard Text Entry and Edit (RPQ D02375)
Note: Keyboard DAS/C is for directory
assistance.
The keyboards have extensive sets of program
function keys. Many of the keys are typematic.

An application program can present a display tothe operator in formatted or unformatted mode.
In formatted mode, the application program
designates protected and unprotected data
fields. Operator entries can be entered,modified, or erased by keyboard action in
unprotected data fields . Operators cannot enter
data into protected fields. Protected data fields
are primarily used in formatting the screen forstructured, tabular data entry. In unformattedmode, the operator enters data on the display
screen in a free-form manner.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-43

5230 Data Collection Units specifications
Physical characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

5234
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight5235
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight5236
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight5239
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight5234, 5235, 5236
115 volts
5239
115 volts

325 millimeters (12.8 in.)
248 millimeters (9.8 in.)
170 millimeters (6.7 in.)
12 kg (25 lb)
500 millimeters (19.7 in.)
330 millimeters (13 in.)
170 millimeters (6.7 in.)
13 kg (29 lb)
230 millimeters (9.1 in.)
535 millimeters (21.1 in.)
387 millimeters (15.2 in.)
13 kg (29 lb)
136 millimeters (5.4 in.)
330 millimeters (13 in.)
170 millimeters (6.7 in.)5.6 kg (12.5 lb)

FrequencykVA
5234, 5235, 5236
5239
Phase
Branch circuit

0.2 ampere
60±0.5 Hz
0.1
0.02
1
15 amperes

P rogramming support
Event Driven Executive.
Prerequisites
Data Collection Interactive RPQs are required:•

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
5234
52 watts (177 BTU)
5235
58 watts (198 BTU)5236
58 watts (198 BTU)5239
23 watts (78 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
4 - 45°C (40 - 113°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%0.9 ampere••

RPQ D02312 is required for the attachmentof the first loop to the system. It includes
one master scheduler attachment card andone loop multiplexer card.
RPQ D02313 is a loop multiplexer card forthe attachment of additional stations to thesystem.
RPQ D02314 is required for the attachmentof the fifth , ninth, and thirteenth loops tothe system. It includes one master scheduler
attachment card and one loop multiplexercard. If the additional loop attachment
cards are not to be installed in the sameenclosure as the first four loops, D02312 isrequired instead of D02314.

CablesEach unit comes with a power cord with alocking plug.
The maximum distance allowed between a 5230
unit and the processor is 1524 meters (5000 feet)for twinaxial cables, and 610 (2000 feet) for
coaxial cables. Connector assembly kits, andcrimp and extractor tools are also available.

4-44

IBM Series/l Digest

5230 Data Collection units
Highlights include:
•

•

•
•

Capability of:Badge reading (punched hole ormagnetic stripe badges)
Punched card reading
Key entry
Values recording, such as counts,
weights, and temperatures registered byexternal devices through a 5230 unit
Choice of several units:5234 Models 1 and 2 Time Entry Station
5235 Data Entry Station
5236 Data Entry station
5239 Value Read Module
Up to 63 units, in any combination, can be
attached by multiple loops
Local operation through a maximum of 1525
meters (5000 feet) .

The 5230 Data Collection units are a family of
devices designed to capture information in a
realtime environment.

5234 Models 1 and 2 Time Entry
StationThe 5234 reads badges and records the time ofentry. It continuously shows the time of day on
a four-position display.

5235 Data Entry Station
The 5235, for card, key badge, and value readentry, is a wall-mounted unit intended forindustrial use. It includes keys that can beused to personalize the user's system, a numerickeyboard with two control keys, a mode switch,
and an eight-position display. Optional features
include:••••Badge Reader Punched Hole (feature # 1401)
Badge Reader Magnetic Stripe (feature#1402)
Card Reader-96 Columns (feature # 1510)
Card Reader-80 Columns (feature # 1520).

A number of data collection units are placed inwork environments linked by one or more cableloops. These loops attach to the Series/1
through attachment cards called loop
multiplexers. The loop multiplexers are in turncontrolled by master scheduler attachment
cards. Each loop supports up to four entry
stations. Each master scheduler card supports
up to four loops.

The 5236 is identical in operation and features
to the 5235. The difference is that the 5236 is atabletop unit intended primarily for use in
non-industrial areas.

The minimum configuration is one RPQ D02312,
which allows the attachment to Series/1 ofthree 5230 units. The maximum configurationis two RPQ D02312s, twelve RPQ D02313s andtwo RPQ D02314s, which allow the attachmentof 63 units.

The 5239 can be optionally attached to a 5235 or
5236 to allow external values, such as weight,
count, and temperature, to be input. The unit
provides direct attachment to external devices,an eight-digit value read, four selectable modesof operation, and wall or pedestal mounting.

5235

5236

5236 Data Entry Station

5239 Value Read Module

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-45

4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit specifications
Physical characteristics

Power requirements (at full load)

HeightWidth
Depth
Weight

115 volts
208 volts
230 volts

2 amperes
1 ampere
1 ampereFrequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.2
1
15 amperes

356 millimeters (14 in.)
216 millimeters (8.5 in.)
536 millimeters (21.2 in.)20.4 kg (50 lb)

Environmental conditions
Heat output/hour
152 watts (522 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 - 105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%Programming support••

Event Driven Executive
Realtime Programming System.

Prereq uisites
4982 Sensor Input/Output Attachment (feature6305) is required.
Rack-Mounting Fixture (feature 4540) is
required if mounting in an 4997 rack enclosureor an EIA standard 19-inch rack.

4-46

IBM Series/I Digest

4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit
Highlights include:
•

•
•

•

Analog input
Analog to digital converter
Analog input control
Programmable amplifier-multirange
Multiplexer-solid state (16 points per
card)
Multiplexer-reed relay (8 points per
card)
Analog output (2 points per card)
Digital input
Process interrupt
Non-isolated
16 points per card
Isolated
Digital output- Non-isolated.

The 4982 provides a flexible, modular approachto attaching user's process I/O applications to
the Series/l. Located near the processor in a
rack enclosure and occupying half the width of
a 19-inch rack enclosure, the 4982 Sensor I/O
Unit is a subsystem of the Series/l.

Each 4982 Sensor I/O Unit, although not
restricted to a single sensor I/O type, cancontain the following maximum sensor points ofeach type:
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

128 digital input/process interrupt (DI/PI)
points, either isolated or non-isolated
128 digital output (DO) points
112 solid-state multiplexer analog input (AI)channels (no amplifier multirange cardused)
96 solid-state multiplexer AI channels(amplifier multirange card used)
56 reed-relay multiplexer AI channels (noamplifier multirange card used)
48 reed-relay multiplexer AI channels(amplifier multirange card used)
16 analog output (AO) points.

Direct program control commands are used fordata transfers between the processor datachannel and the sensor I/O features.

The 4982 attaches to the Series/l by means of
the 4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit Attachment
feature, which can be plugged into either theprocessor or an I/O expansion unit.
The 4982 features are provided in the form ofcards, which plug into the eight feature
locations of the 4982. The features can be usedin any combination except that only one analog
input control card and one multirange amplifiercard (if used) can be in anyone unit. These two
cards service all the analog input multiplexer
cards.

1111111111111111111111111

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-47

4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit
Analog Input Control
This card (feature 1060) contains a 12-bit(including sign bit) analog-to-digital converter
for measuring signals in the ± 5 volt range.
The card also contains the logic for controllingthe sequencing of the other AI subsystem cards.
Only two adjustments are required on the card:
one for O-calibration and the other for full-scalecalibration. Two diagnostic commands are used
to help diagnose the analog input control andamplifier cards. Automatic andprogram-controlled O-correction logic is
included.

Analog Output
This card (feature 1065) generates two points ofanalog output with a resolution of 10 bits
(including sign). Each output voltage point canbe programmed to generate an output voltage
up to ±5, ± 10, or to + 10 volts full scale, witha long-term stability of ± 1/2 theleast-significant bit (LSB) per 10,000 hours. The
maximum output impedance is 1 ohm; themaximum current output is 5 milliamperes at± 10 volts, short circuit protected.

Digital Input/Process Interrupt
Non-isolatedThis card (feature 3525) is a digital input logic
card with signal conditioning at the user
inputs. The card provides 16 points of digital
input for sensing contact closures or logic
voltage levels.
The non-isolated DI/PI feature is similar to theisolated DI/PI feature except for the following:•

A process interrupt input is sensed as anegative transition•

Ground reference of all user input points isthe sensor I/O unit chassis•

Each of the 16 input points, with high- or
low-level capabilities, can detect either user
contact closure (contact sense) or user
voltage levels (voltage sense)•

No common-mode voltage is allowed.

°

Amplifier-Multirange
This card (feature 1070) is a true differential
input instrumentation amplifier with sevenprogrammable input voltage ranges (times 1, 10,25, 50, 100, 250, and 500). It is required formeasuring low-level signals. The amplifier uses
switched frequency compensation for wide
bandwidth and fast settling. It uses the latest
field effect transistor input operational
amplifjers with an input impedance of greaterthan 10 megohms, very low input bias current,
low noise, p.nd a common-mode rejection rationof 80 decibels at 10 volts common mode. There
are two adjustments on the card: one for theoffset voltage adjustment of the input stage andthe other for the offset voltage adjustment of
the output stage.

4-48

IBM Series/I Digest

Digital Input/Process Interrupt
Isolated
This card (feature 3532) is a digital input logic
card with signal conditioning at the user
inputs. The card provides 16 points of opticallyisolated digital inputs for sensing high- andlow-level logic voltage levels in four basic
modes of operation:
1.

Digital input. Allows 16 bits of unlatcheduser data to be transferred to the processor.
No interrupts are generated.

2.

Process interrupt. Allows an interrupt tobe generated when a positive transition
occurs at anyone user input; 16 bits oflatched user data can be transferred to theprocessor. This mode is enabled by program
control.

4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit
3.

4.

External sync. Allows the user to move,into registers, 16 bits of input data andcauses an interrupt to be generated.
Non-isolated 'external sync' input are and'sync ready' output available for the user tosynchronize parallel data transfers by using
the DI/PI feature. External sync mode isenabled by program control.
Diagnostics. Input data can be forced tological O's or logical l's, overriding any user
input states. Therefore, proper data flow
and feature card operation can be checkedby programming. In addition, a status word
is available to determine or verify the stateor mode of the DI/PI card. Diagnostic modeis enabled by program control.

Digital Output Non-isolatedThis card (feature 3535) provides 16 points ofsolid-state, non-isolated digital output. Eachpoint can shunt or switch 0.250 ampere from a52.8-volt source.

Multiplexer-Reed Relay
This card (feature 4940) uses the flying capacitor
method of isolation, a technique that gives thecard a 200-volt common-mode voltage limit anda common-mode rejection ratio of 120 decibels.
There are 8 two-wire channels per card with a
0.64 hertz, low-pass input filter on each input toattenuate normal-mode noise. Because of thepolarized capacitor in the input filter, thenormal-mode signal on the 5-volt range islimited to -0.5 volt to + 5 volts and thenormal-mode over-voltage limit is -1 to + 6
volts. The input signal can have an equivalentsource resistance of 1 kilohm source unbalance.
The maximum sequential sampling rate of therelay multiplexer is 200 samples per second.
The maximum repetitive sampling rate per pointis 15 samples per second. Maximum repetitive
sample rate per point to achieve all
specifications is 1 sample per second.

Multiplexer-Solid State
This card (feature 4950) is a solid-state
multiplexer using MOSFET transistors forswitching. There are 16 two-wire inputs on thecard. The maximum sequential sampling rate of
the multiplexer solid state is 9500 samples per
second. The maximum sample rate on low-levelsignals with O-correction is 5000 samples per
second. The maximum repetitive sample rate
per point to achieve all specifications with a
10-microfarad external filter on the input is 100
samples per second. If external noise is not a
problem, much faster sampling rates can beobtained by operating without the filter. The
maximum voltage that can be applied to either
input line under normal operating conditions is
10 volts. The maximum input voltage is ± 15
volts including common mode voltage. The
input signal can have an equivalent source
resistance of 1 kilohm with a 250-ohm source
unbalance.

Analog Input-14 Bits
This card (RPQ D02071) provides differential
analog input with resolution of either 13 bits
plus sign or 14 bits unipolar. The feature
converts analog input to a corresponding binary
digital value and provides a high resolution AI
control for the Series/I. This feature may be
selected instead of the Analog Input Control
feature.

Multiplexer-Mercury Relay
This card (RPQ D02358) has the same
operational specifications as theMultiplexer-Reed Relay (feature 4940). It is
designed for use in applications that have acontinuous high sampling rate and low-levelsignal inputs. This card is used instead of theMultiplexer-Solid State (feature 4950) becauseof its high common-mode voltage.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-494987 Programmable Communications Subsystem specifications
Physical characteristics

Programming support

HeightWidth
Depth
Weight••

356 millimeters (14 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
610 millimeters (24 in.)40.5 kg (110 lb)•

Realtime Programming System
Series/1 Programmable Communications
Subsystem Preparation Facility
Series/1 Programmable Communications
Subsystem Extended Execution Support.

Environmental conditions
Prerequisites
Heat output/hour
320 watts (1090 BTU)
Cooling
Forced air
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 -105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

CablesPower requirements (at full load)None required.

115 volts
208 volts
230 volts

3.2 amperes
1.6 amperes
1.6 amperes

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.32
1
15 amperes

4-50

IBM Series/1 Digest

The Programmable Communication Subsystem
Controller (feature 1300) is required.

4987 Programmable Communications Subsystem
Highlights include:
•
•

•
•

•

Accommodates multiple line disciplines in asingle communication unit
Accommodates up to 32 lines per subsystemat data rates of 45 to 9600 bits per second(bps)
Supports point-to-point nonswitched andswitched lines or multipoint lines
Handles communication requ irements forstandard IBM protocols and nonstandard
protocols
Allows many communication functions to be
performed outside the Series/1 processor.

The 4987 is a programmable communication
unit that allows the Series/1 to be used in awide range of applications. It occupies the full
width of a 19-inch rack enclosure and attaches
to a Series/1 by means of the Programmable
Communications Subsystem Controller, which
can be installed in a processor or an I/O
expansion unit. The controller includes llKBof storage for user communication-handlingprograms.
A special communication-oriented instruction
set is provided that allows the following
function to be done outside the Series/1
processor:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Protocol handlingControl character generation andrecognition
Chaining of I/O operations
Timer functions
Auto-polling of multipoint hookups
Error retry functions
Break signal processing
Uppercase/lowercase recognition andgeneration
Auto-calling.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Synchronous/asynchronous line type
Switched/nonswitched facility
5, 6, 7, or 8 bits per character
1, 1.5, or 2 stop bits per character
Internal or external clocking
Speeds of 45 to 9600 bps
Least-/most-significant bit characterorientation
Parity of odd, even, or none
Scanning prior ity sequence of each line
Longitudinal redundancy check
Cyclic redundancy check for standard or
user-generated polynomials per line.

The 4987 is a cycle-stealing device an d consistsof the subsystem unit, u p to two controller
features, and device attachment features. The
subsystem unit contains a power supply,
provision for two scanner cards, a backplane,
indicator panel, and space for 16 device
attachment feature cards. The scannerperforms the multiplexing andserializing/de serializing functions for thesubsystem. An optional second scanner (feature3600) allows the 16 feature locations in the 4987
to be divided into two eight-feature groups, withup to 16 lines in each. A controller (feature1300) is required for each scanner.
The 4987 offers a wide variety of programmer
and maintenance aids to enhance subsystem
reliability, availability, and serviceability. For
example, it has program-initiated capability forinternal diagnostics, tracing data and/or
operations of the 4987, and dumping thecontents of the 4987 to the Series/1 for program
debug or problem determination.

The 4987 provides line attachment by means ofexternal modems, direct connection, andcurrent interface. It can accommodate
asynchronous or synchronous disciplines at
speeds to 9600 bps on either switched or
nonswitched facilities. It also provides
auto-calling and auto· answering capabilities.
Features that are program selectable are:I11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111I

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-51

4987 Programmable Communications Subsystem
Device attachment features
Half-Duplex Digital Communications
Equipment Attachment (feature 4730)
Provides for attachment of two independent
switched or non-switched, synchronous or
asynchronous external data sets. If
synchronous, it will use external clocking at
speeds up to 9600 bps. If asynchronous, it willuse internal clocking at speeds from 45 to 1200
bps or 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps.

Full-Duplex Digital Communications
Equipment Attachment (feature 4731)
Identical to feature 4730 except that it provides
one duplex line instead of two half-duplex lines.

Asynchronous Local Attachment (feature
4739)
Provides two interfaces for asynchronoustransmission to systems or terminals without
the use of modems. Operates at speeds from 45
to 1200 bps and 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps.
Operates in half-duplex mode only.

Synchronous Local Attachment (feature
4740)
Provides two interfaces for synchronoustransmission to terminals and other systems
without the use of modems. Operates in
half-duplex mode only with speeds of 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, and 9600 bps.

Autocall Attachment (feature 4743)
TTY Current Attachment (feature 4734)
Provides two DC current loop attachments for
teletypewriters or equivalent devices. Supports
two- or four-wire half-duplex operation. A
programmable local copy option is also
supported in four-wire operation.

Provides for one, half-duplex, digitalcommunication equipment attachment and one
EIA RS-366 auto-call attachment. Operation of
the half-duplex attachment is the same as forfeature 4730. Compatible with Western Electric
801 C or equivalent units.

Audio I/O First Line (RPQ D02337) andAudio I/O Additional Lines (RPQ D02338)
Provides Touch-Tone l input and audio input,
including the capability to record personalized
vocabularies.

Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.

4-52

IBM Series/1 Digest

4987 Programmable Communications Subsystem
Device attachment feature cable
information

Modem cable (feature 2130) is a 6 meter (20foot) modem interface EIA RS-232-C and CCITT
V.24/V.28 cable for use with feature 4743.

The modem cable (feature 2130) is a 6 meter (20foot) EIA RS-232-C and CCITT V.24/V.28
interface cable for use with features 4730 4731
and 4743.
',

Modem cable (feature 2133) is a 6 meter (20foot) modem interface EIA RS-366 cable for use
with feature 4743.

The TTY adapter cable (feature 2066) is a 15
meter (50 foot) interface cable for use with the
TTY adapter (feature 4734).

The EIA extension cable (feature 2100) is a 6
meter (20 foot) EIA interface cable extensionthat can extend total cable length up to:

The attachment cable (feature 2131) is a 6 meter(20 foot) current interface 4-wire cable for use
with the TTY adapter (feature 4734).

•

60.9 meters (200 feet) for asynchronous
operation (up to 7200 bits-per-second)•

12.2 meters (40 feet) for asynchronous
operation (9600 bits-per-second)•

12.2 meters (40 feet) for synchronous
operation•

12.2 meters (40 feet) for feature 4731
(asynchronous or synchronous).

Att achment cable (feature 2132) is a 6 meter (20foot) local attachment EIA RS-232-C and CCITT
V.24/V.28 cable for use with features 4739 and
4740.

Chapter 4. Series/l input/output and system support units

4-53

4993 Series/1 - System/370 Termination Enclosure specifications
Physical characteristics

Programming support

HeightWidth
Depth
Weight•

133 millimeters (5.25 in.)
483 millimeters (19 in.)
325 millimeters (12.8 in.)11.2 kg (25 lb)•
Environmental conditions

Event Driven Executive
Series/1-System/370 Channel
Attachment
EDX Communications Facility.
Realtime Programming System
Series/1-System/370 Channel
Attachment.

Heat output/hour
40 watts (136 BTU)
Cooling
Convection
Operating temperature
10 - 40.6°C (50 -105°F)
Operating humidity
8 - 80%

These Series/1 programs have a corresponding
program support validated with IBM System/370
control programs OS/VS1, OS/VS2, DOS/VS
with BTAM, or DOS/VSE 3.0 with BTAM-ES.

Power requirements (at full load)

Programming considerations

115 volts
200 volts
208 volts
230 volts

0.5 ampere
0.3 ampere
0.3 ampere
0.3 ampere

Frequency
kVA
Phase
Branch circuit

60±0.5 Hz
0.04
1
15 amperes

Proper operation of the feature is dependent
upon the cooperative processing of programs inboth processors. Applications should be
implemented in a manner which guarantees
synchronization. Refer to the "Programming
Considerations" section in the appropriate
Channel Attachment Program Product
Description manual for details.
Prerequisites

One Series/1-System/370 Channel Attachment(feature 1200) is required for each 4993 unit.
Limitations

One 4993 per 4997 rack enclosure may beinstalled (an RPQ must be submitted for morethan one unit per rack). The unit must be
mounted at the bottom of the rack.

4-54

IBM Series/1 Digest.

4993 Series/l-System/370 Termination Enclosure
Highlights include:•

Maximum data transfer rate of 300,000 bytes
per second, in block multiplexer or selector
channel mode•

Optional IPL capability by host System/370•

Up to eight Series/l's per System/370
channel.

The 4993 Modell and its attachment featureprovide storage-to-storage communication
between Series/1 and System/370 (Models 135
through 168, and 3031, 3032, 3033, 308X, 3090,
4331, 4341, 4361, and 4381) processors. Data istransferred under control of both processors.
The unit attached to a Series/1 channel using
its companion Series/1-System/370 Channel
Attachment feature, which can be plugged intoeither a Series/1 processor or an I/O expansion
unit. It is connected to a System/370 selector or
block multiplexer (except 2870) channel where
it appears as a control unit with 32 device
addresses.

The 4993 Modell Series/1-System/370
Termination Enclosure provides the physicalsupport, mechanical connection, and electricaltermination for the System/370 channelinterface cables. It is a full-width module thatis designed to be mounted in a standard 19-inch
enclosure. The enclosure contains the driverand receiver terminators, power source, power
on/off control, enable/disable control, disable
indicator lamp, and mechanical assembly. The
termination enclosure is a single drop on the
System /370 I/O interface.

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-55

4997 Rack Enclosure specifications
Physical characteristics

Power requirements

Model lA and IB
HeightWidth
Depth
WeightNone required.
1000 millimeters (39.4 in.)
613 millimeters (24 in.)
749 millimeters (29.5 in.)
57 kg (125 lb)

Model 2A and 2B
HeightWidth
Depth
Weight1780 millimeters (70 in.)
610 millimeters (24 in.)
749 millimeters (29.5 in.)107 kg (235 lb)

Programming support
N one required.
Prerequisites
None required.
Note: Series/1 units do not require the 4997
rack enclosure. Series/1 units may be mounted
in an enclosure meeting RS-310-B (ANSI
C83.9-1972) dimensional specifications and using
the universal mounting rail hole pattern. Units
mounted in non-IBM rack enclosures must
conform to IBM safety requirements and must
free and clear access for IBM service personnel.
Cables
•

•

•

4-56

IBM Series/1 Digest

Customer Access Panel- Integrated Digital
I/O cable (feature 1593) for connection of
integrated digital I/O non-isolated feature
with the customer access panel feature.
Customer Access Panel- Customer direct
Program Control Adapter cable (feature1594) for connection of customer direct
program control adapter feature with thecustomer access panel feature.
Teletypewriter Customer Access Panel cable(feature 2059) for the Teletypewriter
Adapter feature.

4997 Rack Enclosure
The 4997 Rack Enclosure provides mounting
space for IBM Series/l modular units. It has
EIA (RS-310-B) rack-mounting dimensions forhousing standard 19-inch (482.6-millimeter) rackunits. Four models provide two sizes and achoice of plain or decorative filler covers.

Auxiliary features
The following features are ordered withprocessors or I/O expansion units but pertain to
rack mounting options.
•Customer Access Panel (feature 1590) This feature provides an assembly behind a
Series/l rack for mounting optional,
quick-disconnect type connectors for I/Oequipment. The assembly can accommodate
one timer connector, one teletypewriterconnector, and up to four connectors for
either the Integrated digital Input/Output
Non-isolated feature or the Customer Direct
Program Control Adapter feature.

•

Rack Mounting Fixture (feature 4540) This feature provides a mounting assemblyfor half-width rack units, such as the 4952
Model A Processor. One fixture is required
to mount one of two half-width units in a4997 Rack Enclosure or an EIA standard
19-inch rack enclosure. If only one unit ismounted using the Rack-Mounting Fixture
feature , the empty space will be covered
with a decorative panel similar to the front
covers of Series/l machines.

Models lA and IB have the capacity for
mounting two full-width modular units orcomparable combinations of full- and half-widthmodular units.
Models 2A and 2B have the capacity for
mounting four full-width modular units orcomparable combinations of full- and half-widthmodular units. A rack mounting fixture isavailable for mounting two half-width modular
units.
When a system requires space for modular units
beyond the capacity of a single rack, multiple
racks can be bolted together to form a
multiple-bay enclosure.
Plain front filler covers are available for allmodels. Decorative front filler covers, moresuitable for areas of public display, are alsoavailable for all models.
A primary power distribution system, including
an instant power-off switch, supplies power toall units in the enclosure. A 20-ampere circuit
breaker in the power system provides either
four outlets (Models lA and IB) or eight outlets(Models 2A and 2B).

Chapter 4. Series/1 input/output and system support units

4-57

4-58

IBM Series/ l Digest

5

Series/1 programming support

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support
Series/l hardware is complemen ted by an extensive set of system andapplication programs. These programs provide a variety of support that can
assist you in developing both simple and sophisticated Series/l solutions.
The Series/1 offers a choice of two primary operatin g systems: th e Event
Driven Executive and Realtime Programming System. Both operating
systems are supplemented by functional system programs and programming
languages. In addition to operating system based support, independentfunctional modules are available to allow you to develop your own tailoredsolution.
Also available are application packages that run in conj unction with anoperating system and application packages that provide dedicated systemsolutions.
This section describes both system and application programs available with
the Series/l.
Note: If multiple versions and releases of a Series/l program are available,
this section discusses only the latest version and release level that wasannounced at the time this document was printed. Prerequisite
programming refers to the latest version and release levels, unlessotherwise specified. Subsequent programming announcements will be
included in fut ure issu es of this Series/l Digest or a Series/l Digest
Supplemen t. For information concerning the capabilities of prior versionsof Series/l programming, see your IBM representative.

Chapter 5. Series/ l programming support

5-1

Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Highlights include:
•
•

•
•

•

•
•

5-2

Multiprogramming, multitasking supervisor
Device support includes:
Direct access
Magnetic tapePrinters
Terminals
System/370 Channel Attach
Sensor I/O
Communications.
Flexible operating environment- storage
resident, disk or diskette based
Multiple programming language options,
including Series/l Assembler, EDL, COBOL,FORTRAN, Pascal, and PL/I
Online utilities to support production
operations and assist program development
such as text editors, debugging aids, screen
format builders, remote management, andRemote Job Entry facilities
Online program preparation facility, systemgeneration, and application development
Session manager that provides an.
easy-to-use menu of functions with
automatic allocation of user work files.

IBM Series/l Digest

Event Driven Executive (EDX) is the ease-of-use
oriented operating system for the Series/l. It is
adaptable to a low-entry, diskette-based
production system and larger, disk-based
development or production systems of moderatecomplexity.
In keeping with the Series/l concept of modular
offerings, the functions of the Event Driven
Executive are available through a number oflicensed programs. The Series/l user may selectfrom these offerings to provide the support for aparticular installation.
The Event Driven Executive on the Series/l canapply to a broad range of applications, such asdata entry, remote job entry, distributed
processing, and other commercial applications
and sensor-based functions such as dataacquisition, material and component testing,machine and process control, and shop floor
control.

Event Driven Executive - basic system functions
Basic Supervisor and Emulator(5719-XS5)
The IBM Series/I Event Driven Executive Basic
Supervisor and Emulator (Version 5.2) is
responsible for managing the overall system
operation. All Series/I systems using the Event
Driven Executive operating system require thisproduct. This version supports the expanded
capabilities for the high-end 4956 models:••••

16 partitions supported
2-megabyte storage supported
I/O segmentation register support
Microcode assist for Event Driven
Language (EDL).

Other highlights are:
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

•
•

•

•

Improved problem determination aids.
Disk Immediate-Read support.
System/program Analysis utility.
Multiple volume memory disk facility.
BSC Series/l-to-Series/l transfer utility.
Application programs can be initiated:
From a user terminal throughinteraction with the supervisor
By another program
By outside events, such as an IPL or asensor input interrupt.
Job streams of applications can be executedin a batch like manner through the job
queue processor facility.
Multiple users can run multiple copies ofthe same program concurrently.
Multiple independent applications including
the mix of program preparation andproduction applications can run
concurrently.
Printed output from multiple applications
can be spooled by the system and routed to
one or more printers.
Multiple tasks can be started within an
application program.

•
•
•
•

•

•

Selective base partition for common
mapping.
Performance Analysis Tools.
Terminals can be dynamically assigned toeach application as required.
The relocating loader allows an application
program to use any available main storage
area at the time of invocation.
Storage is managed in 16 partitions withcross-partition services provided for
information transfer and supervisor
services.
A comprehensive set of production oriented
utilities such as data and terminal
management facilities, remote systemmanagement, RJE to host systems, andhardware device exercisers.

The supervisor supports multiple, independent,
time-dependent, and/or event driven
applications with minimum interaction. The
supervisor overhead can range from 15
kilobytes (KB) of storage for small production
systems to over 64KB for a complex interactive
communications system. The supervisor can be
scattered over many partitions for effective
utilization. The average instruction length of
EDL application instructions are from 6 to 8
bytes allowing the generation of verystorage-efficient application programs. This
low storage overhead makes the Event Driven
Executive an excellent base for production
systems.
The emulation capability that the supervisor
supports refers to the ability of the system to
execute programs written in EDL. This
high-level, user-oriented, macro instruction
language is unique to the structure andfunctions of the Event Driven Executive, andthe instructions are actually translated (oremulated) at execution time. Most systemcomponents are written in EDL. This facility
which allows for an efficient use 'of the Series/I,
is part of the basis for the design of theoperating system.

Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-3

Event Driven Executive - basic system functions
A set of utilities provides support for
production environments such as:

Event Driven Executive for theSeries/1 System Unit (5719-XJ5)•

Event Driven Executive for the Series/l System
Unit (Version 5.2) is a condensed version of the
Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).

•

•

•
•
•

A queued job stream processing facility thatprovides batch processing of a series ofprograms with procedures previously
defined and saved on a data set.
A remote management facility that allows acentral site distributed Series/lmanagement strategy. This utility provides
the basis for remote management of
distributed Series/I.
Remote Job Entry facilities to make theSeries/l appear to a host system as a 2780 or
2780 remote work station.
Device reconfiguration facilities forterminals and other hardware devices.
Communication trace facilities for BSC,
ACCA and EXIO attachments.
Device message routing facilities.

A supervisor that supports the maximum
configuration is supplied as the starter
supervisor on a 5.25-inch diskette along withapplicable utilities. The BSC
Series/l-to-Series/l Transfer Utility is also
shipped with this program product to provide
for downloading programs and data from adevelopment Series/I. Event Driven Executive
for the Series/l System Unit is intended for an
operational environment or an Event Driven
Language (EDL) development system.
Prerequisite programming

These utilities are independent load modules
capable of running concurrently with otherapplication programs on the system . .

Series/l Input/Output Executive (5719-EMl).

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

For an operational or a development system,
the following are the minimum hardware
requirements:

Prerequisite programming

None required.

Minimum hardware requirements•

Minimum hardware requirements

For an operational system, the following are theminimum hardware requirements:•••

Series/l processor with 96KB of storage
Series/l disk or diskette unit
Series/l display.

For a development system, the following are theminimum hardware requirements:
•
•
•
•
•

5-4

Series/l processor with 128KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

IBM Series/I Digest••

System Unit with:
256KB of storage
20MB disk
1.2MB, 5.25-inch diskette
Terminal/host attachment card.
Monochrome or Color Personal Computer
Display and Adapter
4201 Proprinter and Adapter.

Event Driven Executive - program development
Program Preparation Facility(5719-XX6)
The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Program Preparation Facility (Version 5) allows
a user to compile application programs that use
Event Driven Language (EDL) macro
instructions. The preparation facility allows:•

Compiling of application programs andEvent Driven Executive supervisors•

Accessing supervisor functions fromapplication programs.

The Program Preparation Facility can run
concurrently with other programs, including
other program preparation activities. The user
can also reconfigure and compile newsupervisors online.
The Event Driven Executive compiler, available
with this product, allows the programmer toaccess all Event Driven Executive supervisor
functions. It supports symbolic file addressing
and selection of any terminal device for listing
output. It provides greater compilation speeds
than the Macro Assembler for those programs
containing only Event Driven Language macro
ins tructions.

These utilities are independent program load
modules capable of running concurrently withother application programs on the system.
A programming development productivity aid
called the "Session Manager" is provided aspart of this product to assist the application
programmer in the efficient use of the systemfor program development. Using full-screen
fill-in-the-blank menus, the session manager
allocates temporary work files and provides aneasy-to-use interface to all the programming
development language compilers, assemblers,
text editors, linkage editors and utilities.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

Event Driven Executive Basic Supervisor andEmulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 128KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/1 display
Series/1 printer.

A set of utilities are provided that provide
productivity aids for Series/1 program
development and program maintenance such as:•

Both single-line and full-screen text editors
for source data entry and modification•

A linkage editor with overlay support•

Interactive debugging facilities•

A program library update facility•

A screen format build facility for use indesigning formatted screen images for
Series/1 terminals.

Chapter 5. Series/ l programming support

5-5

Event Driven Executive - program development
Macro Assembler (5719-ASA)

Macro Library (5719-LM9)The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Macro Assembler allows the user to assemble
application programs or program modules
written in both Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Assembler and Event Driven Language. The
program supports:

The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Execution
Macro Library is used by the Macro Assembler
for:

•
•

Convertifig source code into object modules
Expansion of Series/1 Assembler macros aswell as Event Driven Language macro
instructions.

The Macro Assembler can operate concurrently
with the execution of other programs. It
converts text data sets containing machine
instructions and macro instructions into object
modules to be processed by the linkage editor.

•

Building a basic supervisor and emulator•

Assembling application programs written in
the Event Driven Language instruction set
and/or the Series/1 instruction set.

Macro instructions supplied with the Macro
Library can be supplemented by user coded
macro instructions placed in the library.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

Through the use of the Macro Library,applications coded in the Event Driven
Language can also be processed by the Macro
Assembler, including the reconfiguring or
customizing of the Event Driven Executive
supervisor. User-generated macro instructions
for commonly used routines can be incorporated
into the macro library.
The Macro Assembler also provides the user
with the facility for generating device support
modules or specific routines in support of user
exits or customized supervisory functions.
These routines can be link-edited with user
applications generated in COBOL, the Event
Driven Language, FORTRAN, Pascal and PL/I.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

Event Driven Executive Basic Supervisor andEmulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

5-6

Series/1 processor with 128KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/1 display
Series/1 printer.

IBM Series/l Digest••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Macro Assembler (5719-ASA).

Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 128KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/1 display
Series/1 printer.

Event Driven Executive - program development
Ho st Preparation Facility(5799-BNA)
An IBM System/370 Host Program Preparation
Facility is available for the Series/!. For the
Event Driven Executive user, the host facility
provides the following support:

Macro Libra ry/Host (5740-LM6)
The IBM Series/I Event Driven Executive
Macro Library/Host is a set of libraries andprocedures that reside on a System/370. The
program includes:•••

Translation of Series/I source programs
written in Assembler language into machine
language instructions, producing Series/I
obj ect modules
Printed output-including program listing,symbol dictionaries, cross-references, anddiagnostic messages.

All host components execute with the
System/370 OS/VS2 (MVS) operating system.

•

A macro library, containing Series/I
instructions
A data set, containing sample Job Control
Language (JCL).

The Macro Library/Host, in conjunction with
the System/370 Program Preparation Facilities
for Series/I, provides the capability to assemble
application programs written in the Event
Driven Language and/or the Series/I
instruction set on a host System/370.

The Host Preparation Facility prepares Series/I
code for execution with the Event Driven
Executive.

Chapter 5. Series/ l programming support

5-7

Event Driven Executive - program development
Transactio n Pro cessing System(5719-TRl)
The Event Driven Executive Transaction
Processing System product offers support fordeveloping and managing transaction oriented
user application programs. It provides highprogrammer productivity and use of system
functions without the complexity of an
operating system interface.
The Transaction Processing System provides
support for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

File management
Program management
Storage management
Error management
Terminal management
Multitasking
Multiple address support
Security sign-on and accessTransparent interface to Communication
Facility functions.

Using the Communications Facility, theTransaction Processing System supports 3270
passthru and 3270 emulation.

display stations. This support includes multiple
viewports, color support, daisy chain terminals,
attached 4201 Proprinter, and large-screen
capabilities.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming
Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).
For certain environments and functions, thefollowing Series/1 Event Driven Executive
licensed programs may be required:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Program Preparation Facility (5719-XX6)
Macro Library (5719-LM9)
Macro Assembler (5719-ASA)
Indexed Access Method (5719-AM4)
Communications Facility (5719-CF2)
COBOL Compiler and Resident Library(5719-CB5)
COBOL Transient Library (5719-CB6)
PL/I Compiler and Resident Library(5719-PL5)
PL/I Transient Library (5719-PL6)
Intelligent Workstation Support
Programming (5799-TGC)
Series/1 to PC Connect (5719-CN1).

The Transaction Processing System also
includes a generalized transaction builder thatcan provide functions to develop filemaintenance functions such as adding, deleting,and updating records without programming.
Formats can be created and edited without theuse of a programming language. For moresophisticated processing, exits provide access touser written routines in assembler EDL
COBOL, or PL/I.
"

Minimum hardware requirements

The Transaction Processing System has theadvantage of allowing a user to develop many
interactive applications without the knowledgeof the operating system or programming
languages.

•
•
•
•
•

Transaction Processing System provides native
support for the enhanced functions of the 316X

5-8

IBM Series/I Digest

For the Series/1 System Units, the following
licensed programs are required:••

Series/1 Input/Output Executive (5719-EM1)
Event Driven Executive for the Series/1
System Units (5719-XJ5).

Series/1 processor with 256KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/1 display
Series/1 printer.

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Advanced Remote Job Entry(5719-RJl)
The Series/l Event Driven Executive Advanced
Remote Job Entry program supports both BSC
and SNA/SDLC host connections, and allows
the Series/l installation to conform to theprotocol required by the host system. The
desired line protocol is selected when the
Series/l program is installed. User Remote Job
Entry commands are indepeGdent of line
protocol. The BSC option provides amultileaving RJE (MRJE) work station over a
point-to-point (switched or non-switched)
connection, appearing to the host as an IBM
System/3 with console support. The SDLC
option provides an SNA RJE work station overa point-to-point (switched or non-switched) or
multipoint connection.
The Series/l appears to the host as a PU-type 2
with up to four LU type l's.
The advanced RJE program provides thefollowing support:commands on disk/diskette, and support for
dynamic punch file allocation and delayed
activation.
Full function RJE - In addition to standard
RJE capabilities, ARJE has console support
with status reporting and journaling, data
decompression, and printer form support.
ARJE commands - ARJE commands have been
designed for ease of use and are identical for
MRJE or SNA RJE operation.
Host Remote Job Entry Subsystems - ARJE
supports the following:
BSC
OS/VS2 JES2
OS/VS2 JES3
VM/370 RSCS

SDLC
OS/BS2 JES2
OS/BS2 JES3
DOS/VSE VSE/POWER

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

MRJE - Multileaving Remote Job Entry(MRJE) support for Binary Synchronous
Communications (BSC).

••

SNA RJE - Multiple Logical Unit Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) support for
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC).

Minimum hardware requirements

Unattended operation - ARJE allows
unattended operation by having ARJE•••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Systems Network Architecture (5719-XX9) is
required for SNA operation.

Series/l processor with l28KB of storage
Series/l disk or diskette unit
Series/l display.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-9

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Remote Manager (5719-RMl)

Series/l full-screen application programs,
which can be accessed by EDX-managed
3101 type (block mode) terminals can also beaccessed by HCF. Applications that use anyother device driver cannot be accessed by
HCF (for example, the Transaction
Processing System, 5719-TRl, and theCommunications Facility, 5719-CF2).

The IBM Series/l Event Driven Executive
Remote Manager allows Series/l networks to be
managed and operated through thecommunications and systems management
programs available on IBM host processors(System/370, 30XX, and 43XX). Effective
network management is made possible with the
NetView licensed program and related
communications and systems management(C&SM) programs.

The host 3270 terminal operator, using the
HCF licensed program and the Remote
Manager is able to:
Display system status, examine error
logs, run utilities, start and stop
applications in an effort to effectproblem determination.

The Remote Manager downstream support
allows Series/Is that are connected to aconnection point Series/l through theCommunications Facility (5719-CF2) to interact
with the host network management functions .

Act as the console operator on an
unattended Series/I.

The Remote Manager communicates with thefollowing host C&SM programs:•

Network Communications Control 'Facility(NCCF)•

Network Problem Determination
Application (NPDA)•

NetView•

Host Command Facility (HCF)•

Distributed Systems Executive (DSX).

Start two HCF sessions at any Series/l
concurrently allowing simultaneous
testing and debugging.
•Three maj or functions are provided by the
Remote Manager:•

Alert Processing, the facility to route
Series/l hardware and software error
indications to the Network Problem
Determination Application (NPDA) or
NetView at the host, alerts network
operators of real or potential problems with
Series/l network operation.

Relay, allows user and system data sets andprograms to flow between a Series/l and ahost using Distributed System Executive.
Thus, new or changed data or programs may
be sent to a Series/l in a controlled way.
Data or programs may be retrieved from adevelopment or production Series/I. Data
that originates at the host, or is destined to
be processed at the host, may also betransmitted.

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

Prerequisite programming••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
System Network Architecture (5719-XX9).

Minimum hardware requirements•

Host Operator Facility, allows a host 370
terminal operator to act as a local Series/l
operator. The host operator using the Host
Command Facility (HCF) can issue Series/lcommands and invoke system utilities.

5-10

IBM Series/1 Digest

•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 256KB of storage
Series/l disk unit or diskette unit
Series/l display (for installation only)
SDLC attachment.

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Communication Facility (5719-CF2)
The IBM Series/I Event Driven Executive
Communication Facility (Version 2.1) is alicensed program that manages the flow of
information throughout a configuration that
may include Series/Is, host computers, personal
computers, terminals, and printers. The
Communication Facility is oriented toward
minimal-storage, low-cost Series/Is.

••

Application development aids include:••
It can be used for communication between
Series/I terminal operators and host programs
to which the Series/I appears as an IBM 3270
Information Display System. It includes aids
for the development of application programs,
which can communicate with terminal
operators or host programs or supply otherfunctions required in an installation. The
definition of the configuration is dynamic andcan be extended and modified at any time.
Communication with a host may be· over aleased or switched BSC line operating in
multipoint mode; an SNA connection; or achannel attachment. Communication between
Series/Is may be over a leased or switched BSC
line operating in point-to-point or multipoint
mode, a X.25/HDLC packet-switching network,or over a local Communications Controller.
Communication with personal computers must
be through the Series/I-to-PC Connect
Attachment. I/O devices may be 3270 displays
and printers; Series/I displays and printers,
which the Communications Facility manages as
though they were 3270 devices; or various
devices than can be connected to the Series/I
over BSC lines. The installation can add its
own support for other devices.

Handling transactions-special fixed-format
messages to be processed by user
application programs.
Handling log messages,.

•

Event Driven Language (EDL) - Extended
instructions that allow use ofCommunications Facility features.
A 3270 panel design aid - An interactive
utility that guides the programmer throughcreating a screen image.
Transactions for use by interactive
applications to communicate with Series/I
terminals that are being managed as native
EDX terminals, rather than as 3270
terminals.

Aids for operating and controlling the network
include:
•

•
•
•

•
•

An interactive utility program that prompts
the operator through the process of defining
the network.
Operator commands to allow for on-line
control of the network.
A diagnostic aid utility.
Utilities that allow a central operator tosend files to a remote site, execute programs
at the remote site, allocate and delete data
sets in the remote computer, and make aterminal at the central site operate as
though it were attached to the remotecomputer.
Remote IPL.
A feature that allows a program access to
disk files on remote Series/Is as if they wereon the local Series/I.

The Communications Facility's message
management functions include:

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

•

Prerequisite programming••

Delivering messages from a computer, adevice, or an application program toanother computer, device, or application
program.
Queueing messages in processor storage,
according to sender-assigned priority, foreach destination.
Handling undeliverable messages by placing
them on a user-defined disk queue.

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements•••

Series/I processor with I92KB of storage
Series/I disk or diskette unit
Series/I display.

Chapter 5. Series/I programming support

5-11

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Systems Network Architecture
Version 1 (5719-SXl)

System Network Architecture
Version 2 (5719-XX9)

The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Support of Systems Network Architecture
executes as a separate program within the
Event Driven Executive operating system, andcoordinates all user application programr equests for SNA/SDLC communications. The
basic operation of the systems networkarchitecture (SNA) support involves:

System Network Architecture Version 2 is anenhancement to System Network Architecture
Version 1 (5719-SX1). In addition to the support
contained in version 1, this program offers thefollowing features:•

Establishing communications with the hostsubsystem, including message
recovery /resynchronization ass is tance•Transmitting messages to and receiving
messages from the host subsystem•

Terminating communications with the hostsubsystem.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Support for multiple physical units
Support for more logical units
Less storage required per partition, and lessoverall storage required for large networks
More efficient use of required storage
Increased user flexibility
Transparency of support
Ability to display SNA network status.

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

Application programs on the Series/1 aremasked from the complexities of SNA
transmission and interface at a GET and PUTlevel for transmitting and receiving messages.
Application programs can be written tocommunicate with an Information Management
System (IMS/VS) application program in thehost (logical unit type P) or to communicate
with a Customer Information Control System(CICS/VS) application program as an equivalentof a 3790 full function logical unit.
Prerequisite programming
Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements••••

Series/1 processor with 96KB of storage
Series/1 disk or diskette unit
Series/1 display
SDLC attachment.

5-12

IBM Series/1 Digest

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements••••

Series/1 processor with 128KB of storage
Series/1 disk or diskette unit
Series/1 display
SDLC attachment card.

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Primary System Network
Architecture (5719-XT4)
Primary SNA communications support isprovided for all devices. This support provides
a PU (physical unit) type 4 and PU type 5 image
to the downline PU type 2 controllers. It is not
attachable as a PU type 4/5 directly to a host.
Primary SNA supports the following
controllers:
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

IBM 4680 Store System Controller
IBM 3651 Store Controller (with IBM 3653
or 3683 point-of-sale terminals attached)
IBM 3684 Point-of-Sale Control Unit (with3683 point-of-sale terminals attached).
IBM 3274 Control Units (models 21C, 31C,
41C, 51C, and 61C), using configuration
support C or D
IBM 4701 Finance Communications
Controller (Models 001, 002 and 003)
IBM 4702 Finance Communications
Controller Model 001
IBM 3624 Consumer Transaction Facility(Models 001 , 002, 011 , and 012)
IBM 4730 Personal Banking Machine(Models F01 and F02).

Network configuration for Primary SNA isprovided by the corequisite program, Network
Definition Utility (5719-XT5).
To address the concern of storage limitations,
EDX Primary SNA is designed to allow thecustomer to specify how much of the code isresident at anyone time. The code will beswapped in and out as required for execution
purposes. The ability of the customer tofine-tune the use of storage will allow the moststorage-efficient use of this program.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Network Definition Utility (5719-XT5).

Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 192KB of storage
Series/1 disk or diskette unit
Series/1 display
SDLC attachment card.

Chapter 5. Series/ l programming support

5-13

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Network Definition Utility(5719-XT5)
Network Definition Utility is used inconjunction with Primary SNA (5719-XT4). This
program provides a user-friendly method of
defining the network resource configuration
records for primary SNA networks.
Definition of network configuration records isdone in full-screen mode. Full-screen mode
provides the user with an easy-to-use,
interactive method of creating and updatingrecords. By choosing options presented in themenus, the user defines the configuration
records for the network and all it's component
parts. These same menus can be used to
dynamically alter existing network

5-14

IBM Series/1 Digest

configuration records for subsequent invocation
using Primary SNA. Help screens are available
to aid the user if questions should arise.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Primary SNA (5719-XT4).

Minimum hardware requirements•••

Series/l processor with 192KB of storage
Series/l disk or diskette unit
Series/l display.

Event Driven Executive - communications support
X.25/HDLC Communications
Support Program (5719-HD2)

Systems Network Architecture RJE
Program (5719-SX2)The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Executive
X.25 /HDLC Communications Support programprovides a set of functional modules that allow
the Series/1 to appear as a data terminal
equipment (DTE) or data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE), using the X.25 interface.

The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Systems Network Architecture RJE Program isfor those users who want to transmit jobs toand from a host System/370 by using a systems
network architecture (SNA) protocol (logicalunit type 1). The functions include:

When used as a DTE, the Series/1 can beconnected to an X.25 based packet switched
network. As a DCE, the Series/1 willcommunicate with packet-mode DTEs whose
protocol conforms to the X.25 interface.

•

Submitting jobs to the host•Transmitting remote job entry (RJE)
commands to the host•

Stopping transmission to or from the host.

This program will manage the X.25 protocols onbehalf of the Series/1 users and support many
functions designated as essential services by the
CCITT Recommendation X.25. It performs thefollowing functions:•••

Assembly/disassembly of packets
Connection/disconnection of virtual circuits
Flow control and data packets management.

This program will also enable the Series/1 tocommunicate with other intelligent terminals orprocessors where high-level data link control(HDLC) is used as the link access protocol.
Supported operational modes are Asynchronous
Balanced Mode (ABM) and Normal Response
Mode (NRM). The Communications Facility for
the Series/1 provides a message path interface
to the X.25/HDLC Communications Support
program.

The SNA RJE program transmits and receives
jobs under control of a user terminal work
station in a manner consistent with the Remote
Job Entry programs in the Utilities. The
program requires the installation of the Supportof Systems Network Architecture as aprerequisite.
Host subsystems supported are: DOS/VSE
POWER, OS/VS1 RES , OS/VS2 JES2 or JES3.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Systems Network Architecture (5719-XX9).

Minimum hardware requirements
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 192KB of storage
Series/1 disk or diskette unit
Series/1 display
SDLC attachment card.

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements••••

Series/1 processor with 128KB of storage
Series/1 disk or diskette unit
Series/1 display
Communications attachment hardware.

Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-15

Event Driven Executive - communications support
Manufacturing Automation
Protocol Application Server(5719-XTl)
Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP) 1 isa set of standards based on the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) Reference
Model. These standards enable communicationand cooperation among computers and otherintelligent devices in a multiple-vendor local
area network in manufacturing environments.
The IBM Series/l Event Driven Executive(EDX) MAP Application Server, along withother IBM Series/l EDX programs, allows
EDX-based Series/Is to communicate with othersystems in a MAP network.
Highlights of the licensed program include thefollowing:
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

A subset of Manufacturing Automation
Protocol at the 2.1 level of function
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE) Standard 802.4 (token bus
local area network) and IEEE Standard
802.2 (logical link control) via an external
network interface unit
ISO Internet Connectionless Network
Service (CLNS), as an "end system"
ISO Transport Protocol, Class 4
ISO Session Kernel
ISO Common Application Service Element(CASE) subset
A subset of ISO File Transfer, Access, andManagement (FTAM) functions
A Directory Client Service Agent that
supports inquiries to a centralized network
directory
MAP Network Management Agentfunctions
Reliability, availability, and serviceability
aids, such as trace facilities.

Prerequisite programming••••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Event Driven Executive Communications
Facility (5719-CF2)
Event Driven Executive X.25/HDLCCommunications Support (5719-HD2)
Event Driven Executive Program
Preparation Facility (5719-XX6) for
installation.

Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 512KB of storage
and timer
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printerSynchronous Communications Adapter(#2080) with cable (#2060)
A network interface unit that meets the
MAP specification of the Layer 2 Interim
Network Interface Specification. An
interface converter (V.35/RS449) and an
RS449 secondary cable are also required.

MAP is an acronym of General Motors Corporation to identify its Manufacturing Automation
Protocol.

5-16

IBM Series/I Digest

Event Driven Executive - device support
Certain device support is provided to the Event
Driven Executive user through separate
licensed programs.

System/370 Channel Attach Support(5719-CXl)
The IBM Series/I Event Driven Executive
System/370 Channel Attach Program is used inconjunction with the IBM 4993 Modell
Series/l-System/370 Termination Enclosure andthe IBM Series/1-System/370 Channel
Attachment (feature number 1200). The
program allows the user to develop an Event
Driven Executive application program, written
in Series/I Assembler or Event Driven
Executive, that will communicate with anapplication program in a System/370 over aselector or block multiplexer channel.
Communication with the following processors is
supported:•

IBM System/370 (Models 135 through 168)•

IBM 3031, 3032, 3033, 3081•

IBM 4331, 4341.

This program has been validated with thefollowing System/370 control programs:
DOS/VS, OS{VS1, OS{VS2 (SVS or MVS) and
BTAM, or DOS{VSE with BTAM-ES
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming
Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements••••

Series/I processor with 96KB of storage
Series/I disk or diskette unit
Series/I display
System/370 channel attachment hardware.

Chapter 5. Series/! programming support

5-17

Event Driven Executive - commercial support
These licensed programs aid the Event Driven
Executive user in developing and executingcommercial applications on Series/I.

Index ed Access Method (5719-AM4)
The IBM Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Indexed Access Method (Version 2) provides
data management facilities that support indexed
file operations for the Event Driven Executive.
Such facilities include:••

The use of a predetermined field called a
key that allows the user to bu ild, access,and maintain u ser-defined records inindexed data sets. The program bu ilds anindex of keys that provides a fast access tor ecords in a data set. Both primary(unique) and secondary (duplicate) index
keys are supported. (The Sort/Merge
program is required for this facility.)
The support of a high degree of insert/delete
activity, providing both direct and ·sequential access to the data from multiple
programs concurrently accessing the sameor different indexed data sets.

5-18

IBM Series/l Digest

A single copy of the Indexed Access Method
supports multiple programs and tasks sharing
the same data files. In a shared environment,
data integrity is maintained by record andblock level locking to prevent access to anindexed or data record while the record is being
modified.
Applications that use the Indexed Access
Method support can be programmed in Event
Driven Language, Series/1 Assembler, PL/I, or
COBOL. The program is also supported by the
Sort/Merge program, which will accept Indexed
Access Method data sets as input files.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

Event Driven Executive Basic Supervisor andEmulator (5719-XS5).
Minim um hardware requ irements•••

Series/1 processor with 96KB of storage
Series/1 disk or diskette unit
Series/1 display.

Event Driven Executive - commercial support
S o rt/Merge (5719-SM2)
The IBM Series/! Event Driven Executive
Sort/Merge licensed program handles thesorting and merging of records from up to eight
input data sets into one output data set ineither ascending or descending order. The user
specifies one or more control fields in therecord to be sorted. Sort/Merge:•

Accepts fixed-length or variable-length
records in unblocked or block formats(Variable-length records are only supportedby the Event Driven Executive Cobol
compilers and associated libraries)•

Permits user-written exit routines to handle
I/O errors and process records duringexecution•

Permits deviation from the standards
EBCDIC or ASCII collating sequence at
program execution time•

Allows multiple sorts to be invoked from thesame application•

Routes messages to the operator work
station or printer.

Sort/Merge can be initiated either as a batch
job or from a user routine written in Series/!
Assembler language, COBOL, PL/I, or Event
Driven Language.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
P rerequisite programming

Event Driven Executive Basic Supervisor andEmulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements•••

Series/! processor with 96KB of storage
Series/! disk or diskette unit
Series/! display.

Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-19

Event Driven Executive - application programming
General Purpose Automation
Executive-Distributive GPAX-D(5798-FAS)
General Purpose Automation
Executive-Distributive GPAX-D is a Series/1
EDX-based facilities automation application. It
supports all other equipment manufacturer(OEM) vendors who meet the facilities
automation communications network (F ACN)
protocol. This is typically on a vendor-supplied
IBM Personal Computer (PC) front end to theirdirect digital control (DDC) or programmable
logic control (PLC) equipment. These systems
are referred to as remote intelligent sub-systems(RIS).
GPAX-D can support a variety of OEM RISs on
the same Series/I. The RISs may be in multiple
buildings or sites. Multiple GPAX-D systems
can also be connected using bisync
communications. Information can be sharedwith all systems (GPAX-Ds and RISs).in the
network. GPAX-D provides for monitoring,
control, trend analysis, reporting, graphics,
da~a reduction (highs, lows, averages on hourly,
dally, weekly, monthly basis),meter/consumption tracking, and more. It ismeant not for high-speed process control, butrather for common facilities automation tasks
such as energy management, device

5-20

IBM Series/l Digest

optimization, HVAC (heating, ventilation, andair conditioning), lighting schedules, and more.
GPAX-D provides a common user interface forwhatever variety of systems attached. The OEM
RISs may be used for any suitable purpose
while the GPAX-D host is used more in asupervisory mode to move/calculate values
taken from multiple sources and to provide theengineer with a powerful tool to view data fromall systems at one terminal. GPAX-D is an
improved/enhanced version of GPAX
(5798-RCZ), originally released in 1981.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite Programming

Basic supervisor and emulator (5719-XS5).
Minimum hardware requirements• Series/1 processor with 384KB of storage
and floating-point• Series/1 disk unit with 30 megabytes ofstorage• Series/1 diskette unit
• Series/1 printer• Series/1 display with full-screen capability• Communications attachment.

Event Driven Executive - application programming
Store Item Receiving (5719-DSD)
The Store Item Receiving System is anadaptable system design ed to meet the direct
store delivery receiving and ordering
requirements of retail stores. It uses the fullfunctions and productivity features of theSeries/l. The Store Item Receiving Systemprovides the user with an interactive,easy-to-use, menu-driven application. The
application performs the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Preparing for item deliveries
Receiving and ordering procedures
Reviewing and closin g orders
Printing management reports
Editing and updating files
Close-of-the-day procedures
Operator training.

IBM Store Item Receiving is a group of online
and batch programs. Menu-driven proceduresassist the user during the store receiving
process. Store orders can be created, reviewed,
closed, or cancelled.
Orders captured by hand-held computer (HHC)and transmitted to the store processor can behandled in a similar manner. (User must supply
interface code for their particular HHC device.)
At the end of the day, a file of completed orders
is prepared to send to the host forreconciliation of vendor payments and store
accounting.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
P r erequis it e programming

Highlights are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Supports multiple vendor receiving
procedures
Handles charge (receipts) and credit(returns) orders
Provides item extensions, using authorized
costs and allowances
Provides item authorization and ordervalidation procedures
Prints operational and historical reports byvendor and item
Menu-driven functions with operator
security options
Online and host file editing and updating.

•
•
•
•
•

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
COBOL Transient Library (5719-CB6)
Index Access Method (5719-AM4)
Sort/Merge (5719-SM2)
Transaction Processing System (5719-TR1).

Minimu m h ardware r equir ements••••

Series/1 processor with 512KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 printer
Series/1 display.

Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-21

Event Driven Executive - application programming
Series/! Store Item Management(5798-RTE)

Plant Automation Communication
System (5798-DRX)

The IBM Series/l Store Item Management isdesigned to assist retail store management incontrolling the flow of merchandise fromcheckout (point of sale) through replenishment.
This program uses daily sale information toestablish sales forecasts and maintain inventory
levels. Generated store orders and item
allocations help maintain full shelves and low
back room inventory with reduced manual
effort. Workload leveling and direct store
delivery functions enhance the productivity ofmerchandise distribution.

The IBM Plant Automation Communication
System (PACS) is an IBM Series/I-based
program to assist in the creation of computer
applications for directed manufacturing andprocess control. This program provides a
standard application interface to control
connected vendor interfaces, manage
application data contained in tables and data
files , and communicate network information
throughout a Series/I configuration. Major
components include:•

Prerequisite programming•••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
COBOL Transient Library (5719-CB6)
Index Access Method (5719-AM4).
•

Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•

Series/ I processor with 256KB of storage
Series/I disk unit
Series/I diskette unit
Series/I printer
Series/I display.

•

Systems Communication (SYSCOM) Provides "single system image" forprogram-to-program communications within
the PACS/CF network. Application
programmer uses logical names to reference
other programs.
Data Manager - Provides for fast response
to data requests or updates. Provides uniquequeueing tools for plant modeling. Tables
and/or queues can be either storage or disk
resident. Shadow filing is automatic if
desired. No data base re-organization is everrequired.
Device Communication (DEVCOM) Supports the communication to devices on
the plant floor. A number of specific devices
are supported by the product. A structured
architecture provides a simple method ofcommunicating with new devices, using
existing modules for most of the interface
im plemen ta tion.

Prerequisite programming•••

Basic Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5)
Program Preparation Facility (5719-XX6)
Communications Facility (5719-CF2).

Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•

5-22

IBM Series/ l Digest

Series/l processor with 5I2KB of storage
Series/I disk unit
Series/I diskette unit
Series/I printer
Series/I display.

Event Driven Executive - application programming
Chain Pharmacy System (5798-RGD)
The IBM Series/1 EDX Chain Pharmacy System
offers an in-store prescription control
application for chain pharmacies. All
operations are handled interactively through adisplay terminal and a printer is used toprepare prescription labels. Functions include:

multiple store locations with remote terminals.
Communications between host and store
involving transfer of files and programs isaccomplished by standard Event Driven
Executive SNARJE Communication (5719-SX2)
or standard BSC RJE communication (Program5719-UT5).
Prerequisite programming

•
•
•
•
•
•

Prescription processing
Patient profile maintenance and druginteraction verification
Trade-to-generic and generic-to-trade namecross-referencing
Pricing of prescriptions
Third-party patient and drug eligibility
validation
Data collection and forwarding to a hostsystem.

The EDX Chain Pharmacy System is designed
to provide in-store processing that complements
host processing of a multi-store enterprise.
When appropriate, a single Series/1 can support

•
•
•
•

Basic Supervisor and Emulator Version 3(5719-XS3)
Utilities Version 3 (5719-UT5)
Indexed Access Method Version 2(5719-AM4)
Sort/Merge (5719-SM2).

Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 128KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/1 printer
Series/1 display.

Chapter 5. Series!l programming support

5-23

Event Driven Executive - application programming
Series/I Data Entry System (SIDES)(5796-ZDF)

Standard operating system functions allows forenhanced data integrity and error recovery, as
well as transportability of data entry files ordefinitions between the RPS and EDX operating
systems. In addition, files created by SIDES
can be directly used by other Series/I
applications.

The IBM Series/I Data Entry System (SIDES)
developed by Software Consulting Service, Inc.,is a h eads-down, high-volume key-to-disk data
entry system providing enhanced productivity
for both the implementer and the end user.
Highlights include:

Prerequisite programming•

Menu-driven implementation••

Operator interfaces to enhance throughput•••

System compatibility between both RPS and
EDX•

Extension of the data entry environment
through use of exit facility•

Ability to implement communications withhost systems (4300, 30XX) for update andverification.

The ease of use characteristics areaccomplished via a completely menu-driven
implementation eliminating the need to write
programs to get jobs online and operational.
The menu facility also provides for screen
formats and their associated editing definitions.
Operator productivity is gained by the extensive
use of key assignments to accomplish data entry
functions. In addition, notification is made at
the time an error occurs, allowing immediate
correction and increased throughput.

5-24

IBM Series/1 Digest

Basic Supervisor and Emulator Version 3(5719-XS3)
Utilities Version 3 (5719-UT5)
Program Preparation Facility Version 3(5719-XX4) for system generation anddefining new terminal types.

Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•

Series/I processor with I28KB of storage
and timer
Series/I disk unit
Series/I diskette unit
Series/I display
Series/I printer.

Series/1 Realtime Programming System
The IBM Series/! Realtime Programming
System provides:
•
•

•
•

•

•
•

Multiprogramming, multitasking supervisor
Device support includes:
Direct access
Magnetic tapePrinters
Terminals
Programmable Communications
Subsystem
System/370 Channel Attach
Sensor input/output
Communications with remote systems.
Communications support for a variety ofline disciplines
Task, storage, event and queue management
options - enabling support of concurrent
complex applications
Multiple programming language options,
including Series/! Assembler, COBOL,FORTRAN, Pascal, and PL/I
Online program development and utility
functionsCommand language facility with aneasy-to-use menu interface for requesting
services from the system.

The Realtime Programming System provides afull-function operating system for Series/! users
who wish to develop applications and mixes ofapplications with moderate to high complexity.
The Realtime Programming System contain s
many system management features generally
associated with operating systems on larger
processors.
To enable users to tailor the software to their
particular needs, the Realtime Programming
System offers numerous separately packaged,
supplemental programs. These include program
development tools, languages, commercial,communications, and additional sensor
input/output support.
The Realtime Programming System on the
Series/! can apply to a broad range ofapplications, including commercial use(distributed or stand-alone), communication
applications, including network management,
and sensor-based functions (such as processcontrol).

Chapter 5. Series/! programming support

5-25

Realtime Programming System - basic system functions
Realtime Programming System(5719-PC7)
The basic supervisor and associated services areprovided in a program called the IBM Series/l
Realtime Programming System (Version 7.2).
This program provides operating system
functions to support realtime operations
concurrently with the execution of other batchand on-line programs. The Realtime
Programming System allows the generation ofboth multiple-application systems and smaller,
single-application systems.
The Realtime Programming System supports asingle Series/l processor or multiple Series/l
processors. Multiple Series/l processors areconnected in a high-speed ring by the Local
Communications Controller.
When the system has multiple processors(nodes), all system functions are available foruse. Each node can be dedicated to performing
unique work, being a backup node, or a
combination of both. Each node can have its
own I/O devices and communication lines, or it
can share certain types of devices that are
attached to the other nodes. Except when the
Execute I/O (EXIO) interface is used, theRealtime Programming System manages thelogical sharing of distributed devices to enableapplications to transparently use devices thatare attached to other nodes.
Highlights of the operating system include:
•

•

•

•

A text editor, which provides the ability tocreate and modify text modules that canserve as source input to compilers or job
streams for batch operations. Both single
line and full screen editing is supported.
Application programs that can use a rangeof I/O devices from display terminals, disks,diskettes, and printers to communications
subsystems and sensor I/O devices.
Data management, provided for consecutive
random, partitioned, and indexed files. Disk
spooling of printed output is supported.
Duplex volume support, which is available
when utilizing at least two disks, provides
automatic and transparent data integrity to
the application program and the end user.

5-26

IBM Series/l Digest•

Application programs that can access
communications support code in theoperating system for communicating with
asynchronous (start/stop) or binary
synchronous devices, or to SNA systems.
• A command language facility, which
provides an interactive command- or
menu-oriented interface to terminal users
for invoking user or system programs. The
command language format is similar to thatused in VM/CMS on System/370.
• Command language facility batch support,
which is part of the command language
facility. It enables users to start jobs andhave them run to completion even after an
event such as a re-IPL after a power failure.
• I/D split support for user applications
enables problem-state applications to
expand beyond 64KB. The user's
instructions can expand to 64KB with theuser's data expandable to multiple data
spaces (each up to 64KB).
• A standard operating system is supplied
initially, reducing the need to performsystem generation in development systems.
• Integrated functions, such ascommunications manager, remote manager,
indexed access method, and sort/merge.
A Base Operating System Feature is available
for users who do not require these integrated
programming functions.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming••

There is no prerequisite programming for abase or uniprocessor system.
For a multiprocessor system, theUniprocessor feature (#2136) must beordered also.

Minimum hardware requirements

•

•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 192KB of storage(256KB of storage for a multiprocessor
system)Series/l disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

Realtime Programming System - basic system functions
Communications Manager: The
communications manager functions support line
concentration, message routing, terminal
control, and distributed processing. One ormore Series/l's using the program can beinstalled to manage the flow of information
through the network.

The indexed access method can also provide
data consistently by backing out file updates asneeded in case of an I/O error.
When used with the Multiprocessing Feature,
the following additional functions are available:•

The communications manager supports avariety of terminals and other input/output
devices. Support for non-IBM devices can beincorporated by the user through the use of the4987 Programmable Communications
Subsystem.

Remote Manager: The remote manager
functions enable Series/I networks to be
managed and operated through thecommunications and systems management(C&SM) programs available on IBM hostprocessors (System/370, 30XX, and 43XX).
Effective network management is made possible
with the NetView licensed program and related
communications and systems management
programs.
The remote manager communicates with thefollowing host C&SM programs:•

Applications that use the indexed accessmethod can be programmed in Series/I
Assembler, PL/I, or COBOL. Also, thesort/merge functions accept indexed accessmethod data sets as input files.

Sort/ Merge: The sort/merge functions handle
the sorting and merging of records from up to
eight input data sets into one data set in either
ascending or descending order. The user
specifies one or more control fields in therecord to be sorted. The sort/merge functions:
•

•
•
•

NetView
Host Command Facility (HCF)
Distributed Systems Executive (DSX).

Indexed Access Method: The indexed accessmethod provides data management facilities
that support indexed file operations.

•••
Such facilities include the use of apredetermined field called a key that enables
the user to build, access, and maintainuser-defined records in indexed data sets. The
program builds an index of keys that provides
fast access to records in a data set. Both
primary (unique) and secondary (duplicate)index keys are supported. (The sort/merge
functions are used for this facility.)

Multiple indexed access methods in asystem, each processing files on its own
nodeIndexed access methods can be paired in asystem. In case of a failure, one indexed
access method can assume processing forthe failing other method.

••

Accept fixed-length or variable-length
records in blocked or unblocked formats
Can be initiated either as a batch job, orfrom a user routine written in Series/I
Assembler language, COBOL, or PL/I
Permit user-written exit routines to process
records and handle I/O errors during
sort/merge execution
Permit deviation from the standard EBCDIC
or ASCII collating sequence during program
execution
Allow multiple sorts to be invoked from thesame application
Route messages to the operator work
station or printer.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-27

Realtime Programming System - basic system functions
Advanced Program-to-Program Communication:
Advanced program-to-program communication(APPC) provides enhanced SNA support for
distributed processing. APPC is the name bywhich the functions provided by an
implementation of the LU type 6.2 and PU type
2.1 architectures are known. APPC provides asingle, converged solution to thecommunications requirements of a growing set
of current and future IBM products. As a"universal language" for communication among
distributed transaction programs, APPC resultsin improved connectivity.
Primary SNA Support: This support provides a
PU Type 4 and PU Type 5 image to thedown-line PU Type 2 controllers. It is,however, not attachable as a PU Type 4 or 5 toa host. Primary SNA supports:
•

•
•

•
•
•
•
•

3274 Control Unit (Models 2IC, 3IC, 4IC,
5IC, 6IC) with 3287 printers and 3178, 3278,
and 3279 terminals
4680 Store System Controller
4701 Finance Communications Controller(Models 1, 2, 3) with 4710 printers and 4704
displays
4702 Finance Communications Controller(Modell)
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility(Models 1, 2, 11, 12)4730 Personal Banking Machine (Models
FOI and F02)
3651 Store Controller with 3653 and 3683
Point-of-Sale Terminals
3684 Point-of-Sale Control Unit with 3683
Point-of-Sale Terminals.

5-28

IBM Series/l Digest

In addition, this support allows session passthru
on a logical unit (LU) basis. This enables theSeries/I to pass messages between a logical unit
attached downstream and a logical unit
attached upline from the Series/I. Some user
code is required to activate this support.
Primary SNA, in conjunction with the Remote
Manager function, will pass unsolicited alerts
to the host from the 3274, 3651, 4701, 4702, 4730,
and 4680 controllers.

IBM Series /l-to-PC Connect Support: Support
is included in Realtime Programming System
for the IBM Series/I-to-Personal Computer
Channel Attachment Feature, which is ahigh-speed connection between an IBM Series/I
and an IBM Personal Computer. This hardware
attachment feature enables multiple IBM
Personal Computer local area networks toaccess the IBM Series/I.
The Series/I-PC Connect complements IBM
Personal Computer local area network products
by becoming a communication gateway to thehost. The host can be any remote Series/lor
System/370 processor with which thecommunications manager can presently
communicate.
The IBM Series/I-PC Connect licensed program(5719-CNI) provides the IBM Personal
Computer programming support.

Realtime Programming System - basic system functions
Realtime Programming System for
Series/1 System Unit (5719-PJ7)
Realtime Programming System for Series/1
System Unit (Version 7.2) provides a standard
Realtime Programming System production
operating system for the Series/1 System Unitson 5.25-inch diskettes. The diskettes containthe following:•••

A prebuilt Realtime Programming Systemstandard system that contains support for astandard configuration of the System Unit,
having a full array of device support.
System utilities that would be used in a
production environment.
A binary synchronous transport utility tosend and receive volumes, data sets, andmembers between the IBM Series/1 host andremote System Unit systems.

Prerequisite programming
Series/1 Input/Output Executive (5719-EM1).
Minimum hardware requirements•

System Unit with:
256KB of storage
20MB disk
1.2MB, 5.25-inch diskette
Terminal/host attachment card.

•

Monochrome or Color Personal Computer
Display and Adapter•

Proprinter and Adapter.

The Realtime Programming System active on
the System Unit is for application .execution.
No application development is to be performedon the System Unit. It is assumed that the
System Unit environment has access to a host
Series/1 (non-System Unit) running Realtime
Programming System. This host Series/1
provides the environment for application
development, system customization, anddistribution of programs and data to the System
Unit.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-29

Realtime Programming System - program development
Program Preparation Subsystem(5719-AS7)
The IBM Series/1 Program Preparation
Subsystem (Version 7) provides a group ofcomponents that assist in developing andexecuting user programs. The components are:
•

•

•

•

•

•

A Macro Assembler, which translates
Assembler language source statements toobject modules
An Application Builder, which converts
object modules to executable task sets (aprocess known as link edit in other systems)
A Macro Preprocessor, which allows theuser to develop preprocessed macro
programs, thus improving Assembler
performance
A Job Stream Processor, which allows aterminal user to control the execution of
one or more programs in an interactive orbatch environment
A set of commands and menus withe theCommand Language Facility to aid inprogram preparation tasks
A system facility, which provides the ability
to generate a customized operating system.

This program is used as the basis for program
development in conjunction with the Realtime
Programming System. In addition to the
Assembler provided with this program, it serves
as the interface to the licensed programs thatprovide high-level language capability.
Program development is not supported on the
Series/1 System Unit.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).
Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 192KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/1 display
Series/1 printer.

5-30

IBM Series/1 Digest

Job Stream Processor (5799-TEC)
The IBM Series/1 Job Stream Processor isprovided for those users who require only the
Job Stream Processor portion of the Program
Preparation Subsystem. This program provides
a convenient method of invoking programs andsupplying control information to the system inproduction job streams.
Prerequisite programming

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).
Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/1 processor with 192KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

Realtime Programming System - program development
Transactio n Processing System(5719-TR6)
The Realtime Programming System Transaction
Processing System product offers support fordeveloping and managing transaction oriented
user application programs. It provides highprogrammer productivity and use of system
functions without the complexity of an
operating system interface.
Transaction Processing System provides
support for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

File management
Program management
Storage management
Error management
Terminal management
Multitasking
Multiple address space support
Security sign-on and access
3270 passthru and 3270 emulation using theCommunication Manager
Switched-line terminal support
Transparent interface to Communication
Manager functions.

Transaction Processing System also includes a
generalized transaction builder that can provide
functions to develop file maintenance functions
such as adding, deleting, and updating records
without programming. Formats can be createdand edits performed without the use of aprogramming language. For more sophisticatedprocessing, exits provide access to user-written
routines in assembler, COBOL, Pascal, or PL/I.
The system is menu-driven and allows access tosequential, direct, and indexed files.
Transaction Processing System has theadvantage of allowing a user to develop many
interactive applications without the knowledgeof the operating system or programming
languages.

Transaction Processing System provides native
support for the enhanced functions of the 316X
display stations. This support includes multiple
viewports, color support, daisy chain terminals,
attached 4201 Printer, and large-screen
capabilities.
Prerequisite programming•

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).

For certain environments and functions, thefollowing Series/I Realtime Programming
System licensed programs may be required:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Program Preparation Subsystem (5719-AS7)
COBOL Compiler and Resident Library(5719-CB7) and Transient Library (5719-CB8)
PL/I Compiler and Resident Library(5719-PL2) and Transient Library (5719-PL4)
Pascal Compiler and Object Library(5799-TEQ)
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Preparation Facility (7519-CSO)
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Extended Execution Support (5719-CS2)
Intelligent Work Station Support
Programming RPQ (5799-TGC)
Series/I to PC Connect (5719-CN1)
Series/I Office Connect (5719-XT3).

The following licensed programs are required
when running Transaction Processing Systemon the Series/1 System Unit:••

Series/1 Input/Output Executive (5719-EM1)
Realtime Programming System for theSeries/1 System Unit (5719-PJ7).

Minimum hardware requirem ents
•
•
•
•
•

Series/I processor with 192KB of storage
Series/1 disk unit
Series/1 diskette unit
Series/I display
Series/I printer.

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-31

Realtime Programming System - program development
Host P reparation F acility(5799-BN A )An IBM System/370 Host Program Preparation
Facility is available for the Series/l. For theRealtime Programming System user, the hostfacility provides the following support:•

Translation of Series/l source programs
written in Assembler language into machine
language instructions, producing Series/l
object modules•

Printed output, including program listing,symbol dictionaries, cross-references, anddiagnostic messages•

An application builder, which prepares
object modules for execution by building
load modules or task sets that can executeon the Series/l•

A host application load facility ,. which canbe invoked through TSO to transmit
Series/l object code from the System/370 to
the Series/ l for execution across BSC lines.

All host components execute with the
System/370 OS/VS2 (MVS) operating system.
Communication of programs to and from theSeries/l on a BSC line requires the Native
Application Load Facility (5798-RBR)
field -developed program in the Series/l.
Distribu tion of programs across SNA lines canbe accomplished by using the Remote
Maintenance Utility (5799-TEF).
The Host Preparation Facility prepares Series/l
code for execu tion with the Realtime
Programming System Version 7.

5-32

IBM Series/! Digest

Realtime Programming System - communications support
Remote Management Utility(5799-TEF)
This utility facilitates the operation of a remote
Series/l in a distributed data processing system.
As a network management tool, the program
can:
•

•
•

•

Be accessed from a System/3 70 or another
Series/l and issue Realtime Programming
System operator commands
Transmit, receive, create, reset, or delete adata set on the Series/l
Sched ule programs on a Series/l for
execution, including utilities, storage
dumps, and other diagnostic aids useful in aremote management environment
Shut itself down.

The IBM Series/l Realtime Programming
System SNA Remote Management Utility uses asy nchronous data link control (SDLC) protocol
in its connection to the controlling host system.
A Virtual Telecommunications Access Method(VTAM) application program is also included inthis program to provide the controlling code on
a System/370.

P r ogrammable Communications
Subsy stem E x ecution Support(5719-CS2)
The Programmable Communication s Subsystem
Execution Support runs under con trol of theSeries/l Realtime Programming System andprovides the user with an interface to the 4987
Programmable Communications Subsystem.
The execution support consists of:•

Execution support macros•

A loader utility to load the controller
storage image program into controller
storage.

The macros provide the user with the execution
interface to the 4987 Programmable
Communications Subsystem through theRealtime Programming System Execute I/O andRead/Write support in Series/l Assembler
Language.
The loader utility provides a facility to load auser controller storage image program fromdisk or diskette to controller storage. The user
can initiate the load from the system console oran application program.

This utility program resides in a Series/l and iscontrolled by instructions from another system;
the instructions are transmitted acrosscommunications lines. All functions are
initiated by an application program in th econtrolling system.

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

Prerequis ite p r ogrammin gRealtime Programming System (5719-PC7).

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).

Minimum h ardware requirements

M inimum h a rdware requirem en ts

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 192KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printerSDLC attachment card.

P rerequis it e prog ram ming

Series/l processor with 192KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer4987 Programmable Communications
Subsystem and attachments.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-33

Realtime Programming System - communications support
Programmable Communications
Subsystem P r eparation Facility(5719-CSO)
The IBM Series/1 4987 Programmable
Communications Subsystem Preparation
Facility is used to support the generation ofcontroller storage image programs for the IBM4987 Programmable Communications
Subsystem. The program provides a macro
library for use with the Series/1 4987 Program
Preparation Subsystem. The library can also be
used for assemblies with the Series/1 Base
Program Preparation Facilities.
The macro library provides Series/1 users withthe capability of defining and customizing thetotal protocol for their subsystem. It provides
communications instructions for implementing
user communications applications with twobasic macro types:•

Communications macro instructi~ns•

Communications definition macros.

The communications macro instructions are thevehicl e used to code the customized
communications programs (called function
strings) for each line of the subsystem. They
are a highly specialized instruction set designed
for the coding of function strings in the 4987
Programmable Communications Subsystem.

5-34

IBM Series/1 Digest

The communications definition macros are thevehicle used to define the tables and parameters
used by the function strings. They are used todefine the control characters for each line orline type, th e function strings to be used foreach line or line type, and all t h e pointers
necessary to set up the controller storage.
The assembled output from t hese two macro
types is linked together into a load module by
the standard facilities of the Base program
Preparation Facilities or P r ogram Preparation
Subsystem and placed onto a disk or diskette.
Th is load modu le is referred to as the con troller
storage image program.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming• Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)•

Program Preparation Subsystem (5719-AS7).

Minimum hardware requirements• Series/1 processor with 192KB of storage• Series/1 disk unit
• Series/1 diskette unit
• Series/1 display• Series/1 printer.

Realtime Programming System - communications support
X.25/HDLC Communications
Support Program (5719-HDl)
For Series/l users who require an X.25
interface, the IBM Series/l Realtime
Programming System X.25/HDLCCommunications Support Program is available.
This program provides a set of functional
modules that allow the Series/l to appear as adata termin a l equipmen t (DTE) or data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).
When used as a DTE, the Series/l can beconnected to an X.25 based packet switched
network. As a DCE, the Series/l willcommunicate with packet-mode DTEs whose
protocol conforms with the Recommendation
X.25.
This program will manage the X.25 pr otocols onbehalf of the Series/l u sers and support many
functions designated as essential services by the
CCITT Recommendation X.25. It performs thefollowing fu nctions:•

Assembly/disassembly of packets•

Connection/disconnection of virtual circu its•

Flow control and data packets management.

The X.25/HDLC Communications Support will
also enable the Series/l to communicate withother intelligent terminals or processors where
high-level data link control (HDLC) is used as
the link access protocol. Supported operationalmodes are:•Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM)•

Normal Response Mode (NRM).

The Communications Manager for the Series/l
provides a message path interface to the
X.25/HDLC Communications Support program.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
P r erequisit e p r ogramming
Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).
Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 224KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

5011

Physicalinterface

Maximum
speed (bps)Supported

X .2 1
V. 35

48, 000
56,000Supported 3

V .24

19,200int erface 2

ABM
DuplexHalf duplex

Duplex2080 with
EC 326761

Supported

Sup [1orted

Su pported

2090

Supported 3

Supported 3

Supported

Attachment
feature

2

3

X.25

NRM
(primary /secondary)

Requires selection of appropriate physical interfaces for each networ k application
T wo required (2090 must be equipped wit h EC 3367 58 )Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-35

Realtime Programming System - communications support
Manufacturing Automation
Protocol Communications Server(5719-XT2)
Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP) is aset of standards based upon the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) Reference
Model. These standards enable communicationand cooperation among computers and otherintelligent devices in a multiple-vendor local
area network in manufacturing environments.
The IBM Series/l Realtime Programming
System MAP Communications Server, alongwith other IBM Series/l Realtime Programming
System programs, allows Series/Is tocommunicate with other systems in a MAP
network.
In addition, a companion program, IBM
System/370 MAP Communications Server
FT AM (PRPQ 5799-CGB) allows application
programs in the host to communicate with MAP
processors, numerical controllers, robots, andother industry devices on the plant floor.
Highlights of the licensed program include thefollowing:

•
•

•

•
•
•
•

•
•

A subset of Manufacturing Automation
Protocol at the 2.1 level of function
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE) Standard 802.4 (token bus
local area network) and IEEE Standard
802.2 (logical link control) via an external
network interface unit
ISO Internet Connectionless Network
Service (CLNS), as an "end system"
ISO Transport Protocol, Class 4
ISO Session kernel
ISO Common Application Service Element(CASE) subset
A directory server function that can supply
directory data to other systems in the
n etwork
MAP Network Management Agentfunctions
Reliability, availability, and serviceability
aids, such as trace facilities.

5-36

IBM Series/1 Digest

Prerequisite programming•••

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)
X.25 /HDLC Communications Support(5719-HDl)
Program Preparation Subsystem (5719-AS7)
for installation.

Minimum hardware requ irements• Series/l processor with 1024KB of storage• Series/l disk unit
• Series/l diskette unit
• Series/l display• Series/l printer• Synchronous Communications Adapter(#2080) with cable (#2060)
A• network interface unit that meets the
MAP specification of the Layer 2 Interim
Network Interface Specification. An
interface converter (V.35/RS449) and an
RS449 secondary cable are also required.

Realtime Programming System - communications support
Advanced Remote Job Entry(5719-RJ6)
The IBM Series/l Realtime Programming
System Advanced Remote Job Entry provides
an improved RJE facility for users of theRealtime Programming System. Highlights are:••••Full function RJE console on Series/l
Logging of console activity to a journal file
Support for unattended operation
Status reporting.

The Series/l serves as a Remote Job Entry work
station to a host System/370, 303X, or 4300. The
RJE program in the Series/l can operateconcurrently with other applications. Hostconnection can be either BSC or SNA/SDLC.
The BSC connection provides a standard
point-to-point multileaving technique (MRJE).
The Series/l can transmit and receive data
concurrently. Host connection is supported to
OS/VS2 (MVS) using either JES2 or JES3, andto VM/370 RSCS. The Series/l is viewed by thehost as a System/3 with console support. The
SNA/SDLC connection uses a logical unit type1 protocol. The Series/l is viewed by the hostas multiple logical units, allowing intermixingof input and output data streams on acommunications line. Host connection is
supported to OS/VS2 (MVS) using either JES2
or JES3, and to DOS/VSE/POWER.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming
Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).
Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 2l8KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer
BSC or SDLC attachment card.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-37

Realtime Programming System - device support
S y stem/370 Channel Attach Support(5719- CAl)This program is used in conj unction with the
IBM 4993 Modell Series/1-System/370 Terminal
Enclosure and the IBM Series/1-System/370
Channel Attachment (feature number 1200).
The program a llows the Realtime Programming
System user to develop application programs
written in Series/I Assembler that willcommunicate with an application program in a
System/370 over a selector or block multiplexer
channel.
Communication with the following processors is
supported:•

IBM System/370 (Models 135 through 168)•

IBM 3031, 3032, 3033, 3081•

IBM 4331, 4341.

The Series/I Channel Attach program has beenvalidated with the following System/370 control
programs: DOS/VS, OS/VS1 , OS/VS2 (SVS or
MVS ) and BTAM , or DOS/VSE with BTAM-ES
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

5-38

IBM Series!l Digest

Prerequisit e progra mming

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).
Minimum hardw are requirements

•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/I processor with 192KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/I display
Series/I printer
System/370 channel attachment hardware.

Realtime Programming System - commercial support
This program facilitates the development andexecution of commercial applications on the
Series/l and is available to the Realtime
Programming System user.

Sort/Merge (5719-SMl)
The IBM Series/l Realtime Programming
System Sort/Merge licensed program handles
the sorting and merging of records from up to
eight input data sets into one output data set ineither ascending or descending order. The user
specifies one or more control fields in therecord to be sorted. The licensed program:•

Accepts fixed-length or variable-length
records in unblocked or blocked formats•

Can be initiated either as a batch job, orfrom a user routine written in Series/l
Assembler language, COBOL, or PL/I•

Permits user-written exit routines to handle
I/O errors and process records-during
Sort/Merge execution•

Permits deviation from the standard
EBCDIC or ASCII collating sequence at
program execution•

Allows multiple sorts to be invoked from thesame application•

Routes messages to the operator work
station or printer.

Prerequisite programming

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7), base
operating feature 2
Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 192KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

This product is integrated into the uniprocessor feature of Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7).
Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-39

Realtime Programming System - application programming
Series/1 Office Connect (5719-XT3)
The Series/l Office Connect program provides
for the exchange of documents among officesystems and intelligent work stations. To
exchange documents, Personal Services/PC is aprerequisite for the IBM Personal Computer,and Displaywriter Electronic Document
Distribution is a prerequisite for the
Displaywriter. Series/l Office Connect also
provides mailbox functions for intelligent work
station users.
There is no text creation or editing function
provided for attached Series/l fixed function
terminals. All document creation and editing is
performed on the connected intelligent work
stations.

Series/l Office Connect also allows theexchange of Personal Computer Disk Operating
System (DOS) files among IBM Personal
Computer users attached to these systems.
The IBM 5219 letter quality printer is supported
as a Series/l print server for all work stations,regardless of their point of connection. The
IBM 5219 Printer supports document content
architecture revisable or final form documents.
An IBM Personal Computer (running Personal
Services/PC) attached to one Series/l may print
a letter quality document on an IBM 5219
printer attached to another Series/I.
This program product is available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming

The library facilities provided by Series/l OfficeConnect allow a Personal Services/PC 1.2 user
to file , search for , retrieve, print, or delete
documents stored in the Series/l library. Fixedfunction terminal users can also access, view,
and print documents stored in this library.
Series/l Office Connect supports IBM Systems
Network Architecture Distribution Services(SNADS) and IBM Document Interchange
Architecture (DIA). This allows interchange of
documents among products such as:•

IBM Distributed Office Support System/370(DISOSS/370)•

IBM Personal Services/36•

IBM System/38 Office•

IBM Personal Computer•

IBM 5520 Administrative System•

IBM Displaywriter•

Other IBM Series/Is•

Non-IBM office product work stations, andsystems - (custom design transforms are
required).

5-40

IBM Series/! Digest

•
•
•
•

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)
Series/l to PC Connect (5719-CNl)
Transaction Processing System (5719-TR6)
Program Preparation Subsystem (5719-AS7).

Minimum hard ware requirements
•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor (4956 Model E or H) with
1MB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

Realtime Programming System - application programming
Series/I Data Entry System (SIDES)(5796-ZDE)
The IBM Series/I Data Entry System (SIDES)
developed by Software Consulting Service, Inc.,is a heads-down, high-volume key-to-disk data
entry system providing enhanced productivity
for both the implementer and the end user.

••

The ease-of-use characteristics areaccomplished by a completely menu-driven
implementation eliminating the need to write
programs to get jobs on-line and operational.
The menu facility also provides for screen
formats and their associated editing definitions.
Operator productivity is gained by the extensive
use of key assignments to accomplish data entry
functions. In addition, notification is made at
the time an error occurs, allowing immediate
correction and increased throughput.
Use of standard Series/I operating system
functions (Realtime Programming System/Event
Driven Executive) allows for enhanced data
integrity and error recovery, as well astransportability of data entry files or definitions
between the RPS and EDX operating systems.
In addition, files created by SIDES can bedirectly used by other Series/I applications.
To extend the data entry environment, an "exit"
capability has been provided to allow for theunique requirements of individual customer
environments.

••

Prerequisite programming••

System highlights
The IBM Series/I Data Entry System (SIDES)
puts productivity and flexibility in a
key-to-disk, heads-down data entry environment
by providing these characteristics:•

Menu-driven implementation
There is little or no need for the user towrite programs for jobs, screen definitions,formatting or editing.

Operator interfaces to enhance throughput
The system provides extensive use of
key assignments.
It includes a Help facility.
It notifies the operator at the time anerror occurs to eliminate the need forre-keying.
System compatibility
Both Realtime Programming System andEvent Driven Executive support thesystem.
Jobs can be transported between
operating systems.
Files can be used by other Series/I
applications.
It permits error recovery through use ofstandard operating system functions.
Operators can use terminals for otherfunctions once they finish data entry.
Terminals can be attached locally or
remotely.
Extension of the data entry environment
through use of exit facility
The system provides the capability to
implement additional functions on the
Series/I.
It allows implementation of exits via
COBOL, Assembler, or EDL.
Ability to implement communications
The system allows the user to implement
communications with Host systems(4300, 30XX) for update and verification.

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)
Program Preparation Subsystem (5719-AS7)
is required on a development system.

Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•

Series/I processor with 256KB of storage
and a system timer
Series/I disk unit
Series/I diskette unit
Series/I display
Series/I printer.

Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-41

Series/1 communications - local area network support
Series/I-P C Connect (5719-CNI)The Series/I-PC Connect is a Series/1 licensed
program that runs on an IBM Personal
Computer, IBM Personal Computer XT, or IBM
Personal Computer AT. It supports theSeries/1-to-Personal Computer Channel
Attachment (feature number 4000), a high-speed
connection between a Series/1 and an IBM
Personal Computer. Series/I-PC Connect
complements the IBM PC Network Program,
giving IBM Personal Computers on the IBM PC
Network and the IBM Token-Ring Network
access to Series/1 disks and printers. It also
provides access to System/370 applications fromthe IBM PC Network and the IBM Token-Ring
Network.
Highlights are:•

IBM PC Network Program server function

Realtime Programming System communications
manager. The communications manager
supports several communications protocols,such as bisynchronous, X.25, and the Series/1
Local Communications Controller. The Local
Communications Controller can operate on the
IBM Cabling System.
Series/I-PC Connect provides the connection
between a Series/1 and an IBM Personal
Computer attached to a local area network toallow multiple IBM Personal Computer local
area networks access to Series/1
communications, disks, and printers.
Series/I-PC Connect complements Personal
Computer local area network programs bybecoming a communications gateway to thehost. The host is any remote Series/lor
System/370 processor that communicates with
the Series/1 Communications Manager.

extensions•

IBM Personal Computer disk emulation
serVIces•

IBM Personal Computer print services•

Local area network independent services•

Interprogram communications•

IBM PC Network SNA 3270 Emulation

The Series/I-PC Connect Program uses the IBM
Personal Computer Disk Operating System(DOS) and the Network Basic Input Output
System (NETBIOS) communications interface.
P rerequisite programming•••

Personal Computer Disk Operating System
Version 3.1 (P/N 6024211)
Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7),
or
Event Driven Executive Communications
Facility (5719-CF2).

Program support through Series/1
communications•

Remote management services

Minim um hardware requirem e n ts

The Series/I-PC Connect licensed program isdesigned to allow IBM PC Network users tocommuni_cate with other users and programs
outside their own local area network.

••
Separate IBM PC Networks may be attachedeither to the same Series/lor to separate
interconnected Series/Is. The Series/1
interconnection is accomplished with the

5-42

IBM Series/ l Digest••

IBM Personal Computer, IBM Personal
Computer XT, or IBM Personal ComputerAT with a keyboard, display, and a diskettedrive
IBM Series/1-to-Personal Computer Channel
Attachment (#4000)
Intersystem channel cable (#4001)
IBM PC Network attachment cards are
required in all LAN attached Personal
Computers.

Series/1 high-level language support
Series/l provides a choice of multiple high-level
languages for use with the two operating
systems. Both the Event Driven Executive andthe Realtime Programming System support
COBOL, PL/I, Pascal and FORTRAN language
options. COBOL and BASIC compilers
developed using Control Program Support
modules are also available as stand-alone
systems. The compilers and other programs
supporting these programming languages aredescribed in this section.

Chapter 5. Series!l programming support

5-43

High-level language support - COBOL
COBOL for Event Driven Executive
and Realtime Programming Systemerror checking, and error messages at five
severity levels.

These COBOL products provide a high-level
programming language oriented towardcommercial applications:

COBOL for the Series/1 is designed according
to the specifications for American National
Standard COBOL, X3.23-1974, as understood andinterpreted by IBM as of January, 1981, withthe exception of the Rerun clause (which ischecked for syntactic validity, only). It exceeds
the low intermediate level COBOL as defined in
FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard)
Pub 21-1. Some of the features above the lowintermediate level include support ofsort/merge, indexed I/O (packed decimal data),
and various extensions of the nucleus features.

•

•
•

•

Event Driven Executive COBOL
Compiler and Resident Library Version
2 (5719-CB5)
Event Driven Executive COBOL
Transient Library Version 2 (5719-CB6)
Realtime Programming System COBOL
Compiler and Resident Library Version
2 (5719-CB7)
Realtime Programming System COBOL
Transient Library Version 2 (5719-CB8).

COBOL compilers are available to users ofeither the Event Driven Executive or Realtime
Programming System operating system.
Because COBOL for the Series/1 has a highdegree of compatibility with COBOL on otherIBM systems, the programmer may, withinreasonable guidelines, transfer source programs
between the Series/1 and other IBM systems,
such as the System/370 and the System/34.
The COBOL compilers generate executableobj ect codes a nd call library subroutines thatinteract with the operating system. Provided
with the COBOL compiler on each Series/1
operating system is a resident library. The
COBOL resident library consists ofcommonl y-used subroutines that are combinedwith a user program through the applicationbuilder or linkage editor to form an object
program for subsequent execution on Series/I.
The COBOL transient library (separate licensed
program) is used in conjunction with theexecution of COBOL user programs. Routines
in the transient library are loaded only whenneeded, thus allowing a more efficientutilization of main storage. These routines arereentrant and can also be executed from ashared area in a user partition, or from ash ared task set during object program
execution.
Program development and productivity aids
include: symbolic debug, flow trace, extensive

5-44

IBM Series /I Digest

These program products are available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
Prerequisite programming•••

For Event Driven Executive COBOL
Compiler and Resident Library (5719-CB5)and Event Driven Executive COBOL
Transient Library (5719-CB6), Basic
Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5) isrequired.
For Realtime Programming System COBOL
Compiler and Resident Library (5719-CB7)
Realtime Programming System Version 5(5719-PC5) and Program Preparation
Subsystem Version 5 (5719-AS5) are
required.
For Realtime Programming System COBOL
Transient Library (5719-CB8) Realtime
Programming System (5719-PC7) is required.

Minimum hardware requirements••

For execution of Event Driven Executive
COBOL Compiler and Resident Library(5719-CB5) and COBOL Transient Library(5719-CB6), the minimum hardware
requirements are the same as thedevelopment system requirements for the
Basic Supervisor and Emulator.
For Realtime Programming System COBOL
Compiler and Resident Library (5719-CB7)
and COBOL Transient Library (5719-CB8),
the minimum hardware requirements are
the same as the requirements for theRealtime Programming System.

High-level language support - COBOL
Host COBOL for the Series/1

Prerequisite programming

Series/1 users who have access to a System/370
may compile their COBOL programs on special
compilers that execute on the System/370 undercontrol of OS/VS2 (MVS). Two Host COBOL
compilers are available:

•

•

•

IBM Host COBOL for the Series/1 Event
Driven Executive Operating System(5799-TEL)IBM Host COBOL for the Series/1
Realtime Programming System(5799-TEP).

The level of COBOL supported by both hostcompilers is equivalent to that available in
COBOL Version 2 for the Event Driven
Executive and Realtime Programming System.
No source modification is required to transferfrom host to native compilation.

•

For Host COBOL for the Series/1 Event
Driven Executive Operating System(5799-TEL), Basic Supervisor and Emulator(5719-XS5) is required.
For Host COBOL for the Series/1 Realtime
Programming System (5799-TEP) Realtime
Programming System (5719-PC7) is required.

Minimum hardware requirements
In addition to the Series/1 system requirements
for COBOL compilation and execution, theSystem/370 requires the following:•••

System/370 Processing Unit
System/370 OSjVS2 MVS (Multiple Virtual
Storage)Communications features for the transfer ofobject code to a Series/l.

Host compilation allows the progr~mer to be
more productive by using the larger system forprogram development. Highlights include:•

Series/1 object modules produced on
System/370•

Interactive compilation capability withaccess to Structured Programming Facility(SPF) and Time-Sharing Option (TSO)
editing•

User options (including source and object
listings, cross reference, storage map,statement offset listing, and MAP370
listing).

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-45

High-level language support - PL/I
Seriesj1 PLjI
The following programs are available for
Series/1 PL/I:•

Event Driven Executive PL/I Compiler
and Resident Library (5719-PL5)•

Event Driven Executive PL/I Transient
Library (5719-PL6)•

Realtime Programming System PL/I
Compiler and Resident Library Version
2 (5719-PL2)•

Realtime Programming System PL/I
Transient Library Version 2 (5719-PL4).

Series/1 PL/I is a problem-oriented, high-level
language that can be used for programmingr ealtime, scientific, problem-solving, andtraditional data processing applications as wellas advanced applications, such as transaction
processing and data base handling. PL/I isaimed at speedin g up application development
time by making available a wide range offacilities, including error detection anddebugging aids. PL/I is available to users of theRealtime Programming System and the Event
Driven Executive as separate products for each
operating system.

5-46

IBM Series/ l Digest

Series/1 PL/I is a subset of American National
Standard PL/I (ANSI 3.53 1976), plus additional
language functions to support multitasking
applications. Functions vary according to thelicensed program version selected for theSeries/l. However, both operating systems
allow:•

Optimized object code•

List-directed and edit-directed stream I/O•

Indexed Access Method support•

Sort/Merge•

Full screen 4978 and 4979 terminal support•

Communications support.

Series/1 PL/I represents a significant advantage
for the Series/1 high-level language user.
Entire applications can be written in ahigh-level language that provides interactive
terminal-handling faci lities andcommunications through binary synchronous or
start/stop disciplines to other processors andterminals, all using highly-optimized Series/1
code.

High-level language support - PLjI
Language support is provided through a
two-program structure: A compiler, together
with a resident library and a transient library.
•

The PL/I compiler translates source
statements into Series/1 object code.

•

The resident library contains frequently
used routines that are included in a user
program by the application builder orlinkage editor.

Prerequisite programming

•

•

•

The transient library contains lessfrequently used routines, such as I/Otransmission, error handling, and data
conversion. These functions are
dynamically loaded at execution time, thus
permitting storage savings with minimal
impact on performance.

This method of dividing the PL/I functions
affords the multiple-location Series/l user withsignificant economies. The compiler andr esident library licensed program can be used ata central source for program development andmaintenance, and the obj ect modules, combinedwith the transient library licensed program,
would be used at the outlying locations.

••

For Event Driven Executive PL/I Compiler
and Resident Library (5719-PL5) Basic
Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5) isrequired.
For Event Driven Executive PL/I Transient
Library (5719-PL6) Basic Supervisor andEmulator (5719-XS5) is required.
For Realtime Programming System PL/I
Compiler and Resident Library (5719-PL2)
Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)
and Program Preparation Subsystem(5719-AS7) are required.
For Realtime Programming System PL/I
Transient Library (5719-PL4) Realtime
Programming System (5719-PC7) is required.

Minimum hardware requirements••

These program products are available on either
5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.
•

For Event Driven Executive PL/I Compiler
and Resident Library (5719-PL5), theminimum hardware requirements are thesame as the development system
requirements for the Basic Supervisor andEmulator, with an additional 32KB ofstorage.
For Event Driven Executive PL/I Transient
Library (5719-PL6) the minimum hardware
requirements are the same as theoperational system requirements for the
Basic Supervisor and Emulator.
For Realtime Programming System PL/I
Compiler and Resident Library (5719-PL2)
and PL/I Transient Library (5719-PL4), theminimum hardware requirements are thesame as the requirements for the Realtime
Programming System.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-47

High-level language support - FORTRANFORTRAN IV Compiler and Object
Support Library (5719-F02)
The Event Driven Executive and Realtime
Programming System operating systems bothsupport the F ORTRAN IV language. This
compiler and object support library program isavailable for either of the operating systems.
Series/l FORTRAN IV is a high-level,
mathematically-oriented language designed toincrease application programming productivity.
One of the first high-level languages, it hascontin ued to receive wide acceptance because of
its easy-to-learn format and computing rules.
Series/l FORTRAN requires a complementary
set of subroutines called Mathematical andFunctional Subroutine Library. In addition, an
optional Realtime Subroutine Library, which is
supported by the Realtime Programming System
only, is available in two versions.
Series/l FORTRAN IV is a subset of American
National Standard FORTRAN, X3.9-l966, andincludes the American National Standard BasicFORTRAN, X3.1O-l966, with the exception of
obj ect time formats , adjustable dimensions,complex data type, G-format specifications, andtwo-level format parenthesis. Series/l
FORTRAN IV also has many language elements
not provided by ANS Basic FORTRAN. These
extensions adapt FORTRAN to the Series/l
environments and provide greater programming
flexi bili ty.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Multiple program support
Logical and relational operations
Bit-level operations
Direct access I/O
Additional Read/Write parameters
Device-independent I/O
List-directed I/OSingle and double precisionSix-character names
Expanded character set.

5-48

IBM Series/1 Digest

The FORTRAN compiler produces object code,
maps, and listings. The code emphasizes
compact storage and execu tion speed. The
object support library is a g.roup of subroutinesdesigned to be combined, when needed, with theobject modules produced by the compiler toform an object program, executable on the
Series/l under control of the Realtime
Programming System or Event Driven
Executive supervisor. The library subrou tines
perform input/output processing, error
handling, explicit and implicit service
operations and bit manipulation .
FORTRAN-provided diagnostic aids or services
assist in program creation and debu gging.
FORTRAN IV also assists in detecting program
data errors and offers several levels of error
handling for I/O device errors.
Pre requis it e progra mming••

For Event Driven Executive, Basic
Supervisor and Emulator (5719-XS5) isrequired.
For Realtime Programming System,
Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)
and Program Preparation Subsystem(5719-AS7) are required.

Minimum h a rdware requirements••

For use with Event Driven Executive, theminimum hardware requirements are thesame as the operational requirements for
the Basic Supervisor and Emulator.
For use with Realtime Programmin g
System, the minimum hardware
requirements are the same as therequirements for Realtime Programming
System.

High-level language support - FORTRAN
Mathematical and Functional
Subroutine Library

Program product 5719-LM3 is available oneither 5.25-inch or 8-inch diskettes.

The following programs are available:

Prerequisite programming

•

•

•

Event Driven Executive Mathematicaland Functional Subroutine Library(5719-LM3)
Mathematical and Functional
Subroutine Library Version 2(5719-LM2).

This set of subroutines is utilized primarily by
FORTRAN IV application programs on the
Series/I. The library contains subroutines
commonly used for mathematical and data
conversion functions . Included in the library
are:
•

•

•

•

Mathematical functions, including sine,
cosine, logarithms and exponentiation
functions , maximum and minimum
functions , modular arithmetic, and others.
A commercial subroutine package,
containing a library of subroutines that willmeet most requirements for decimal data
handling. These subroutines, similar to
those offered on other IBM systems, provide
comprehensive facilities for editing, decimalarithmetic and data compaction, andconversion subroutines for data
manipulation.
Subroutine library services, which allow
Assembler language users to initialize andrel ease a library work area and to specify
an abnormal termination processing routinethat returns control to the user on programinterrupts or abnormal execution of system
macro instructions.
Error-checking routines to detect error
conditions during processing ofmathematical and conversion routines ,including checking of illegal arguments andinvalid conversion data inputs, testing
floating-point divide exceptions, and testing
floating-point overflow and underflow
conditions.

•

For Event Driven Executive Mathematicaland Functional Subroutine Library(5719-LM3), Basic Supervisor and Emulator(5719-XS5) is required.
For Mathematical and Functional
Subroutine Library (5719-LM2) Realtime
Programming System (5719-PC7) is required.

Minimum hardware requirements••

For Event Driven Executive Mathematicaland Functional Subroutine Library(5719-LM3) the minimum hardware
requirements are the same as theoperational system requirements for the
Basic Supervisor and Emulator.
For Mathematical and Functional
Subroutine (5719-LM2) the minimum
hardware requirements are the same as therequirements for the Realtime Programming
System.

Chapter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-49

High-level language support - FORTRANFORTRAN IV Realtime Subroutine
Library (5719-F04)
The IBM Series/l FORTRAN IV Realtime
Subroutine Library (Version 2) provides usersof the Realtime Programming System who are
writing application programs in FORTRAN IV
or Series/l Assembler with additional function
suitable to a realtime execution environment.
Included are:•Executive function subroutin es that provide
the ability to start, stop, or delay the
execution of programs•

Process I/O subroutines that access analog
and digital points for both input and output•

System service interface subroutines thatmake system services available to the
problem programmer. Examples areattaching/detaching tasks, defining/deleting
queues, enqueuing/dequeuing,
defining/deleting events and resources, and
so on

•

Time subroutine that determines thecurrent time of day•

Data subroutine that determines the current
calendar date.

5-50

IBM Series/l Digest

Prerequisite programming••

Realtime Programming System (5719-PC7)
Program Preparation Subsystem(5719-AS7).

Minimum hardware requirements

•
•
•
•
•

Series/l processor with 192KB of storage
Series/l disk unit
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printer.

High-level language support - Pascal
Series/1 Pascal

Prerequisite programming

IBM Series/l Pascal is a compatible subset of
System/370 Pascali VS(5796-PNQ). Two
programs are available for the Series/I:

•

•

•

Pascal Compiler and Object Library
PRPQ for the Event Driven Executive(5799-TER)
Pascal Compiler and Object Library
PRPQ for the Realtime Programming
System (5799-TEQ).

Pascal is high-level programming language
capable of supportin g a wide variety of
applications. Series/l Pascal I/O support
includes seq uential and random files, display touser terminals, formatting facilities , and many
input/output extensions to Standard Pascal.
The Series/l programs are compatible with theproposed International Standards Organization(ISO) standard as of June 1981, with several
extensions.

•

For Pascal Compiler and Object Library
PRPQ for the Event Driven Executive(5799-TER), Basic Supervisor and Emulator(5719-XS5) and Program Preparation
Facility (5719-XX6) are required.
For Pascal Compiler and Obj ect Library
PRPQ for the Realtime Programming
System (5799-TEQ), Realtime Programming
System (5719-P C7) and Program Preparation
Subsystem (for compile and applicationbuild only) (5719-AS7) are required.

Minimum hardware requirements
•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/I processor with 256KB of storage
Series/I disk unit
Series/I diskette unit
Series/l display
Series/l printerFloating-point (for compilation of real
numbers).

Each Series/I PRPQ provides a compiler andobject libr ary in a single program. For program
development the Pascal compilers interfere with
the Event Driven Executive session manager
and the Realtime Programming System
Command Language Facility. Series/l Pascal
includes execution time debugging aids,
messages, and tracing. Object code is reentrant.
Pascal programs can interface with user
programs written in Assembler or Event Driven
Langu age .

Cha pter 5. Series/1 programming support

5-51

Additional system support
Store Application Environment,
Version 1, Releases 1, 2, and 3(5719-YT7)
The Store Application Environment Release 1 isan easy-to-install package consisting of a set of
Event Driven Executive (EDX) licensed
programs for the retail store industry. Release 2
adds a high-level interface to simplify thecreation of primary SNA application programsfor communicating with IBM 4680s and otherretail-ori ented devices. Release 3 adds anease-of-use system interface that shields thecustomer from the complexities of EDX andsimplifies system customization. Parts of thispackage can be ordered as an option.
Highlights include:•••

Release 1
An easy-to-install systems software,industry-oriented solution
Supports current Series/I application
packages for the distribution and store
systems industry
Allows application customization.
Release 2
Provides all the functions andcharacteristics of Release 1, plus
Primary SNA support for the IBM 4680
and other retail-oriented devices
High-l evel application program interface
for primary SNA applications.
Release 3
Provides all the functions andcharacteristics of Releases 1 and 2, plus
Allows easy customization of system
configurations
Eases alteration of system
configurations
Eases definition of all system
configurations at a central location.

Release 1 provides:••••

An event-driven operating system
An SDLC connection to a host as asecondary SNA processor
Indexed file access
Sort/merge capability

5-52

IBM Series/ l Digest• Cobol execution support• A transaction manager with workstation•••

support for:316X local and dial-up display stations- 3101 or equivalent local and dial-up
terminals
Both SDLC and BSC communications withhost System/370 systems for 3270
pass-through and emulation support
Network management and maintenanceSupport for existing Series/I application
packages, such as Store Item Management(5798-RTE) and Store Item Receiving(5719-DSD).

Release 2 supports:• IBM 4680 Store System Controller• IBM 3651 Store Controller•

IBM 3684 Point-of-Sale Control Unit.

Release 3 adds the following functions:• A high-level,transaction-oriented userinterface with extensive integrated help
• Easy system definition, initialization, andreconfiguration• Clear, concise messages that appear as help•••

screens and that provide specificinstructions in case of an error
An easy method for installing Program
Temporary Fixes (PTFs)
Access to the Transaction Processing
System (TPS)
Distributed processing on TPS terminals.

Prerequisite programming

None required.
Minimum hardware requirements

•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Series/I processor (4956 Model HIO) with 1
megabyte of storage
Two 5.25-inch 40-megabyte disk units
Series/I 5.25-inch 1.2-megabyte diskette unit
IBM 4202 Proprinter XL
Two IBM 3161 displays
Multifunction attachment (feature 1310)
Feature Programmable Multiline Control
and Adapter (Features 2095 and 2096).

Additional system support
S e ries/l Interactive Executive(5719-UNl)

Major subsystems include:•

Programming tools

The IBM Series/l Interactive Executive is amulti-user, timesharing, operating system for
the IBM Series/l and is based on UNIX 3 System
V as licensed by AT&T Technologies, Inc.

•

Document preparation tools•

File control•

Source code control•

Electronic mail•

System resource accounting.

Features include a simple command language,
device independent input/output, hierarchicalfile system. program development tools, and amechanism that enables a user to perform
complex operations by connecting, in a simple
way, a number of program modules.

P rerequisite programm in g

None required.

The IBM Series/l Interactive Executive
supports a wide range of environments andapplications area. This includes time-sharing,batch processing, as well as program
development.

Minimum hardware requirements

Tools are provided to facilitate doc;ument
preparation and the C-language compiler allows
for migration of UNIX-based applications to the
IBM Series/I.

•
•
•
•

•

Series/l processor with 512KB of storage
and floating-point feature
Series/l diskette unit
Series/l disk unit
Series/l printer
Series/l display.

Highlights are:•Reentrant code•

Hierarchical file system• File and record locking• File protection system•

Swapping• Flexible command language•

Modular utilities•

Background and foreground processes.

Trademark of AT&T Bell Laboratories
Chapter 5. Series/ l programming support

5-53

Additional system support
Series/l Input/Output Executive(5719-EMl)
The Series/I Input/Output Executive runs on
the Series/I System Unit processors to provide
support of the 5170 I/O devices to the Series/I
operating systems (Realtime Programming
System or Event Driven Executive). Thesesystems operate on the Series/I processor whichis integrated into the 5170.

Additional support provides most functions of
the Series/I programmer's console on the IBM
Personal Computer display and keyboard aswell as utilities to install and customize theproduct. An IBM Personal Computer display
and keyboard are prerequisites for the
installation and operation of the Series/I
Input/Output Executive.
Prerequisite programming

Series/I Input/Output Executive supports:••

5.25-inch, 20- or 30-megabyte fixed disks.

••5.25-inch, high capacity diskette drives.

•

IBM P ersonal Computer Monochrome
Display.

•

IBM Personal Computer Color Display.

•

IBM P ersonal Computer Keyboard.

•

4201 matrix printer.

•

Asynchronous, binary synchronous, andSDLC interfaces.

•

Terminal/Host Attachment Card with four
RS-422·A ports; ports 0 - 3 can be used forasynchronous communications providing
features of four single line ACCA
controllers. Support is provided for 3101
terminals (model 13, character mode, andmodel 23, character/block mode) and 316X
display stations.

5-54

IBM Series/I Digest

Event Driven Executive for the Series/I
System Unit (5719-XJ5), or
Realtime Programming System for theSeries/I System Unit (5719-PJ7).

Minimum hardware requirements•••

System Unit with:
256KB of storage
20MB disk
1.2MB, 5.25-inch diskette
Terminal/host attachment card
Personal Computer monochrome or color
display and adapter
4201 Proprinter and adapter.

Additional system support
while a file is concurrently beingtransferred to or from the Series/I.
Subroutines for transport data transfer andblock checking are provided as part of thisprogram for inclusion in the Series/1
application.

Series/1 Intelligent W ork Statio n
Version 2 (5799-TNG)
The Series/1 Intelligent Work Station Version 2
provides for the connection of IBM's family of
Personal Computers to the IBM Series/I. It
supports asynchronous communications
between the Personal Computer and theSeries/1 in direct-attach and switched-line
configurations at speeds of up to 9,600 baud.

•

Direct print- A Series/1 application program
may cause printable data to be routed
directly to a Personal Computer printerwithout going through an intermediate filetransfer and without operator intervention.

•

Outboard formatting- Allows constant data
for Series/1 interactive full-screentransactions to be stored on the Personal
Computer diskette or disk. This data does
not need to be transmitted from the Series/1
each time it is needed.

•

Keyboard redefinition- Many of the
Personal Computer keys may be redefined
to make the keyboard more suitable for an
application. This feature allows a single
keystroke to generate a string of charactersfor frequently used commands. Keyboard
redefinition is not in effect when switched
to DOS mode.

•

Color display support- Has four colors in 80
character mode only. The colors are
invoked based on the field attributes
assigned by the controlling application
program.

Highlights include:•

3101 Terminal emulation- Allows the
Personal Computer to emulate and IBM
3101 Display Terminal in character or block
mode.

•

Mode switching- Operates in either DOS
mode or in terminal emulation mode. It uses
a hot key to toggle the computer from one
mode to the other. An active DOS programis suspended when the Personal Computer isin terminal emulation mode.

•

File transfer- A series/1 application
program can initiate the transfer of files
between the Series/1 and a Personal
Computer. One may switch to DOS modeand use programs from the IBM AssistantSeries, the IBM Accounting AssistantSeries, the IBM Business Management
Series, or th e IBM Personal Decision Series

Chapter 5. Series/l programming support

5-55

Series/1 program distribution, licensing, and support
For the IBM Series/I, there are four categories
of programming support:

Field-Developed Programs/Installed
User Programs•

Licensed program (LP)•Field-developed program (FDP)•

Installed user program (IUP)•

Programming RPQ (PRPQ).

Field-developed programs are licensed programs
normally developed by IBM branch officepersonnel to perform end-use, productivity, ortransitional functions for the user. Installeduser programs are licensed programs that havebeen produced by or for an IBM system user
and used successfully to perform a variety ofuser functions. FDPs and IUPs are normallyoffered with a monthly charge for a fixed
number of months with future payments waived
at the end of this fixed number of months.

Licensed Programs
Licensed programs perform an end-use function
for the user. Highly specialized task-oriented
programs may also be provided as licensed
programs.
Licensed programs are distributed through IBM
Software Distribution to customers under theterms of the Agreement for IBM Licensed
Programs. The majority of Series/I programs
are offered with an option of a continuous
monthly charge or a one-time charge with
future payments waived. Under either payment
option, the licensed program remains theproperty of IBM and is subj ect to the provisionsof the Agreement for IBM Licensed Programs.
For most Series/I software offerings, there is a
one-time process charge to cover the cost of
distribution of basic machine-readable material,
including service updates. Customers who havemultiple licenses for a program and redistributewithin their own enterprise may elect to pay
only one process charge.
Depending on the product, Central Services
may be included as part of the license fee.
These services include the correction of design
defects and the distribution of these corrections
to users of record. The duration of Central
Services varies by program. AP ARS for
products supported by the IBM Support Centerare submitted electronically by IBM level 2
personnel. APARS for other products are
submitted by mail to the address specified in the
product's program directory.

5-56

IBM Series/l Digest

FDPs and IUPs may be announced with orwithout Central Services.

Programming RPQs
To meet individual customer requirements, IBM
offers the following customized programming
serVIces:
By means of programming RPQs (Request forPrice Quotation), customers may request
alterations or additions to available IBM
programming. These programming RPQs
(PRPQs) will be provided for a charge and may
be used in conjunction with Series/I RPQs to
optimize solutions to unique data processing
problems.
Correction of design and documentation errors
in Series/I programming RPQs is the
responsibility of IBM. This service is available
for each programming RPQ for a specified andlimited time, at no additional charge.
Programming RPQ users may submit APARs torequest program error correction.
Programming corrections will be distributed to
all users of record.

6

Series/1 support services

Chapter 6. Series/1 support services
Series/l support continues to underline IBM's commitment to customer
serVIce:•

Customer-servicing techniques based on built-in diagnostic aids•

Round-the-clock and across-the-country service and parts availability•

Extensive training for customer personnel- both formal classes andself-study courses.

As with Series/l equipment and programming, you select only theparticular modules you need for a given installation.

Chapter 6. Series/l support services

6-1

IBM customer engineer support
MaintenanceSpecial diagnostic tools

IBM's serviceability strategies are aimed atminimizing the amount of time and expense
incurred to identify and diagnose the failure,
repair the defect, verify the correction, andreturn the system to the customer for use. To
support these strategies, IBM customer
engineers are provided a number of tools to aid
in servicing Series/l.

Four unique maintenance tools have beendeveloped for use by your customer engineer inservicing your Series/I:

Integrated maintenance package (IMP)Maintenance documentation, when included in
the Series/I purchase price, is provided andshipped with each IBM unit.
The integrated maintenance package includes
maintenance information manuals, maintenancelogic diagrams, theory·diagram manuals, anddiagnostic program listings for each unit thatprovide detailed information for ease of
servlclng.
Maintenance Analysis Procedure (MAP) charts
for the system and I/O attachments are provided
to assist the IBM customer engineer indiagnosing machine failures.
IBM has also developed extensive diagnostic
programs for use with Series/l. As an example,
the system exercises and tests the IBM I/O
devices, their associated I/O attachment
features, and the processor functions. The
mainline tests are used in conjunction with the
MAP charts. They identify failures and direct
the customer engineer to the probable failingfield-replaceable unit (FRU). Auxiliary tests
are provided under computer control to assist
the customer engineer in performing timings,
adjustments, and calibrations.
All these diagnostics are provided to you withyour system. They are shipped (on diskette)with the machine and are, therefore, available
for use whenever they are needed.

6-2

IBM Series/! Digest~••••fI· O
::::

...

'

~

--. - ----.---

.....

~

IBM customer engineer support
These tools are available for the customer
engineer's use and are strategically located inbranch offices and remote locations, as
appropriate, across the country.

Customer Service Maintenance Console: Thispanel provides all of the functions of the
programmer console, and it is packaged in a
portable case that can be easily moved from one
system to another. If the customer engineer
needs the functions of this console for hardwareor program problem diagnosis, but a
programmer console is not available on the
failing system , the IBM customer engineer will
use this console to accomplish the problem
diagnosis.
Maintenance Program Load Device: The
diagnostic programs that are used to isolate
machine failures are distributed to the field on
diskette. If there is no diskette unit included in
the user's configuration and it is necessary to
use the diagnostic programs, the customer
engineer service representative can provide a
portable Maintenance Program Load Device.
The unit is be plugged into any available I/Ofeature location in the system and can be used
to load diagnostic programs from diskette.
Signal Tracing and Recording Device: This
device is used by the customer engineer tocapture intermittent error conditions and to
trace I/O channel operations. This tool can beused to record up to 64 words (128 bytes) of
information. The customer engineer can install
the box and, if appropriate, leave it unattended
to trap the intermittent failure. After the
failure has occurred, the recorded information
can be read out and used to reconstruct thesequence of events that led up to the failure.
Using this information, the customer engineer
can more effectively define the failure and thenreplace the appropriate field-replaceable unit ortake other necessary remedial action.
Communications Indicator Panel: This panel
provides a visual display of various stages,
conditions, and interface lines associated withthe communications attachments (for example,
data set ready, data terminal ready, request tosend, clear to send).

Additional maintenance support

In the event that an IBM customer engineer
requires diagnostic support in addition to all of
the on-site items, a support structure isavailable to call upon when needed. Support
personnel for each machine type are located in
IBM branch offices and/or within thegeographic region to provide assistance to theon-site customer engineer.
The customer engineer interfaces with RETAIN(a data base containing known problems) by
calling the Boca Raton Service Planning andSupport Group for assistance. The customer
engineer discusses the failure symptoms with aservice planning representative who enters theinformation into RETAIN. Fixes are verballycommunicated to the customer engineer.
The Teleprocessing Support Center provides
specialized diagnostic phone assistance andcomputerized testing of teleprocessing devices(non-SDLC). Plant assistance is provided by the
IBM Service Planning and Support Groups,
including direct interface to IBM engineeringgroups as required.
Repair parts are stored in strategically locatedField Distribution Centers (FDCs) to support
the IBM customer engineers who provide
warranty and maintenance agreement (MA)
service on Series/I. IBM's Parts Inventory
Management System (PIMS) maintains acomputerized online inventory of all of theparts-stocking locations to ensure that parts areavailable.

Maintenance agreement: Series/1 elements
undergo extensive testing during and after
manufacture to ensure that the equipment you
receive will serve you properly. To continue
this support, IBM recommends the IBM
Maintenance Agreement at the conclusion ofyour 90-day parts and labor warranty. The IBM
MA provides maintenance parts coverage 24
hours a day, seven days a week. You select thelabor periods as appropriate for your system.
Travel by private auto or scheduled public
transportation during hours of MA coverage
will not result in any additional charge.

Chapter 6. Series/1 support services

6-3IBM customer engineer support
The minimum monthly maintenance charge(MMMC) provides for labor during any 9consecutive hours within an 11 - hour
window-Monday through Friday. Additional
optional periods of labor coverage are available
up to 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, for an
additional fee.
If you require labor outside the MA coverage

period, it is available on a per call, hourly
basis . Again, MMMC provides for maintenanceparts coverage regardless of the time of day
that the part is installed.

Other IBM customer engineers upport
Physical planning for Series/1 is a customer
responsibility. However, IBM customer
engineer physical planning assistance can offer
significant benefits and should be considered
for the first several installations of every
Series/1 customer order. This assistance isavailable for a fee under two offerings:
1.

Engineering changes: IBM provides
engineering changes for Series/1 under thesame terms and conditions as is done for other
IBM products.
Safety, new production, and quality changes areprovided at no charge for parts or laborwhether or not a customer has an IBM
Maintenance Agreement.

2.

Maintenance reduction changes will also be
provided at no additional charge to IBM
customers with an MA and will be available tonon-MA customers on a charge basis.
On machines with an IBM MA, IBM will orderand a utomatically ship appropriate engineeringchanges (ECs). The IBM customer engineer
will install the changes and update allappropriate documentation and history. There
will be no additional charge for this service.
On machines without an IBM MA, customers
can s ubscribe to IBM customer engineering
memorandums and engineering changeannouncements, which will notify them of theavailability of ECs. Customers can order theECs as they choose. When the ECs arrive, thecustomer can notify IBM of their availability
a nd an IBM customer engineer will install thechange and update the appropriate
documentation. There will be no charge forparts or labor except maintenance reduction
ECs.

Telep rocessing systems services
Teleprocessing systems services are available to
IBM teleprocessing customers having an IBM
processor with an IBM communications adapter
and remote IBM terminals serviced under amaintenance agreement.
This work scope includes:
•
•

•

•

6-4

IBM Series/I Digest

Fixed-price agreement - IBM will provide
advice and direction regarding physicalplanning activities. The customer will
receive a completed and personalized
Customer Site Preparation Guide that canbe used as a reference for future
installations that will normally be done by
the customer. The customer will be billed afixed fee; hence, expenses can be accurately
budgeted.
Per call - IBM will provide advice, counsel,
and clarification of information containedin the IBM Series/l Customer Site
Preparation Manual, GA34-0050. The
customer will be billed at the hourly rate
for the assistance, including travel time andexpense.

Problem determination caused by non-IBM
modem/data set failureStandby diagnostic assistance for data
communication lines and non-IBM
modems/data sets
Requests to other vendors by IBM forservice on data communication lines andnon-IBM modems/data sets
Installation coordination for data
communication lines and non-IBM
modems/data sets.

Additional IBM customer services
Special Product Engineering
Services
Special Product Engineering Services areoffered by IBM to help customers install their
IBM Series/1 sensor-based application. The
sensor-based subsystem is defined as that
portion of the sensor-based system between thecustomer access area of the sensor-based systemand the customer process or equipment, andincludes the instrumentation and theinterconnections at both ends.
After the customer and the IBM marketing
representative have established the application
requirements, Special Product Engineering
Services will, in conjunction with theirofferings, meet with the customer. They will
inspect the customer's facilities and review thecustomer's application plans and functional
concepts of the subsystem.
Having established the functional requirements
for the subsystem, the customer may then electto contract with IBM under a fixed-priceoffering for the type of installation services
required. Special Product Engineering Services
include:
•

•

•

•

Subsystem definition- Definition
documentation to meet particular subsystem
requirements. Includes description ofneeded hardware and modifications to thecustomer's existing equipment as well as
installation and checkout instructions.
Installation guidance service- On-site
technical guidance during installation andcheckout of the subsystem and , at thecustomer's option, development of thesubsystem installation plan.
Customized equipment design andprocurement- Provide, throughsubcontractors, special equipment,terminals, and interface panels for use with
Series/l.
Installation management- Define thesensor-based subsystem and, throughsubcontractors, assume responsibility forthe physical installation and checkout of
the subsystem.

Sens or-Based System Services
Sensor-Based System Services are offered undera special contract.
Sensor-Based System Services include:•

Instrumentation problem
determination- Isolation of the cause of
failure to the instrumentation that is
attached to this machine to the extent thatsuch isolation can be made at the machineinterface.

•

Sensor-based diagnostic
assistance- Diagnostic assistance or standby
on the repair of interconnecting lines andinstrumentation that is attached to thismachine. Includes running of system tests ,interpreting their output and verifying
proper signal levels at the machineinterface. This service is to be requested ofand provided by IBM only when the causeof failure within the interconnecting lines
or instrumentation cannot be independently
determined.

•

Requesting of sensor-based vendor
service- Making of arrangements andrequests for service directly with vendors,
for service of interconnecting lines andinstrumentation that is attached to thismachine. Customer must previously notify
respective vendors that requests for service
on the customer's system will be received
directly from IBM (not available per call).

•Sensor-based installation
coordination- Generation and maintenanceof a schedu le for installation, system
integration, and testing of interconnecting
lines and instrumentation that is to be
attached to this machine. Includes periodic
review of schedule changes with thecustomer and appropriate notification toaffected IBM locations (not available percall).

Chapter 6. Series/ l support services

6-5Additional IBM customer services
IBM Support Center
The IBM Support Center (1-800-237-5511)
provides defect-oriented support for licensed
users, of supported releases of designated IBM
licensed programs, experiencing problems.
Assistance is provided 24 hours daily, 7 days per
week for problem reporting, problem
management, status information, problem
source identification assistance, identifying
known problems, and problem correction
assistance. In-depth problem correction support
is provided in a call-back mode from 8:30 a.m. to
6 p.m. , Eastern time, Monday through Friday(except national holidays). Current andsubsequent versions of Event Driven Executive
and Realtime Programming System and selectedlicensed programs supported by Central Service
that operate in conjunction with them , areeligible for this service.
The IBM Support Center is designed to meetthe customer' s responsibility to perform
problem determination and problem source
identification.

6-6

IBM Series/I Digest

The customer should attempt to identify thesource of programming problems by following
procedures outlined in the Problem
Determination Guide. The National Service
Division customer engineer is available forproblem determination assistance, and the IBM
Support Center provides problem source
identification assistance.
When contacting the IBM Support Center,customers need the access code that has been
assigned to their installation; this code
identifies them as an eligible user of the
support center. The access code is normallyprovided by the customer's IBM marketing
representative.
A complete listing of Series/I software
components and their support classifications is
included in the IBM Programming Systems
General Information Manual (PSGIM),
G229-2228. An explanation of the IBM Support
Center and its functions is included in the IBM
Series/l Software Service Guide, GC34-0099.

Series/1 education
Series/I education support includes self-study
and classroom courses. Customers may enroll
in classroom courses or order self-study courses
by calling 1-S00-IBM-246S. For additional
information on Series/I education, please callthe above toll-free number or consult theCatalog of IBM Education, (G320-1244). Course
fees are also listed in the IBM Series /l Pocket
Digest, GX34-0104.

Chapter 6. Series/l support services

6-7Series/1 education
Realtime Programming Systemsuggested cours e sequence
Note: It is highly recommended that one personfrom each Realtime Programming System
account attend the Realtime Programmer
System system programmer curriculum toprovide assistance in designing and generatinga Realtime Programming System.

.

J
Self-study
Computer Concepts (A2508)
Programm ing Design Fundamentals (S2510)
Ser ies/ 1 Hardware (SS 138)
Ser ies/ 1 A sse mbl er Language Introduction (SS132)
ANS '74 COBOL Language Fundamentals (SS126)
ANS '74 COBOL Programming (SS127)
PL/ 1 Prog ramm ing (10103)
FORTRAN IV Language Fundamentals (SS129)
Commu ni cations System Concepts (10026)
3270 Operation and Design (10031)
SNA Fundamentals (32501)
S/ 1 4987 PCS Pre pa ration Facility (MI002)
S/ 1 4987 PCS Ext ended Execution Support (MI004)

1
2

1
2
4
5

1
2

1
2

1
2

1
2
83
83

4
5
4
4
5
7
6
93
10 3

Classroom
Realtime Prog ramm ing Syst em Facilities andOpe ration s (S3511)
ANS ' 74 COBOL Batch Prog ramm in g In t roducti on(02085)
Series/ 1 T ransaction Processi ng Syst em Worksh op(S3513)Rea ltime Programming Syst em Generation and
Maintenance (S2519)
Commun icat ions Manager fo r Seri es/ 1
Install ation (02084)
Ser ies/ 1 SNA Programm ing Interface (P2024)
Series/ 1 Remote Manager Installat ion Work shop
(S3506)

!f

I

..

.

3

3

3

IBM Series/l Digest

3

6
6

7
4
81
82
92

~.- .

.;...
"I,'" Cc' ....-c~ ......... ~

6-8

3

•

.

'.,: . ...•--""----'lw.. .... _'.
..

Series/1 education
Event Driven Executive suggested
course sequenceIJ
I J'" J J I
I
• J

I I
It

~
w

. I I
~

u

::l

w

Self-study
Computer Concepts (A2508)
Programming Design Fundamentals (S2510)
Series/ 1 Hardware (SS 138)
Using EDX and EDL on the IBM Series/ 1 (32919)
Series/ 1 Assembler Language Introduction (SS132)
ANS '74 COBOL Language Fundamentals (SS126)
ANS '74 COBOL Programming (SS127)
PL/1 Programming (10103)
FORTRAN IV Language Fundamentals (SS129)
Communications System Concepts (10026)
3270 Operation and Design (10031)
SNA Fundamentals (32501)

1
2

2

3

3

1
2
4
3
5

1
2

1
2

1
2

3

3

3

11,2,4
21,2,4
3 1,2,4
5 1,2,4
4 1,2,44
5
4
4
71.2,4
91,2,4
81,2,4

Classroom
Event Driven Executive EDL Implementation Workshop(S3505)
ANS '74 COBOL Batch Programming Workshop (D2085)
Series/1 Transaction Processing System Workshop(S3513)
Event Driven Executive Control and Flow Workshop(S3503)
Event Driven Executive Communication Facility(S2550)
Event Driven Executive Communication Facility
Additional Topics (S3512)
Series/1 SNA Programming Interface (P2024)
Series/1 Remote Manager Installation Workshop(S3506)EDL Implementation Workshop Advanced Topics(S3509)Map Architecture/Application Interface (S3515)
Map Application Server (S3516)

6 1,2,4

4

53

6
73
7
10 1,4
111
102
112

5

7
114
124

. .' '1";}},~....

~lWI.:

-;"

~l

•• "

. . .-;,~, r"\1

.

_.

--'

>

_"-,,,.J.

Chapter 6. Series/l support services

6-9Series/1 education - self-study courses
Communications Systems Concepts

FORTRAN IV Language
Fundamentals

10026, approximately 7 hours
88129, approximately 30 hours
This course introduces communications systems
and communications systems products. It
defines basic terminology and describes the
major characteristics of communications
systems applications.

3270 Operation and Design
10031, approximately 28 hours
This course explains the content and formationof 3270 data streams, remote and local
operations, and 3270 configurations and screen
design.

This course teaches the basics of FORTRAN IV
programming.

Introduction to Series/1 Assembler
Language
88132, approximately 20 hours
This course teaches the basic concepts ofassembler using the Series/l Assembler
language as a basis. Basic terminology andconcepts are presented in enough detail toprepare the student for taking Series/l courses
requiring language skill.

PL/I Programming
10103, approximately 80 hours
This course consists of 23 topics covering the
major facilities of PL/I, with several exercisesfor each topic.

ANS '74 COBOL Language
Fundamentals
88126, approximately 25 hours
This course develops the skills needed to code
programs using ANS '74 COBOL.

Series/1 Hardware
88138, approximately 25 hours
This course allows the student to identify the
major components of the Series/I, understandthe concept of input/output data transfer on a
Series/I, and understand the logic of theSeries/I machine language instructions.

Using Event Driven Executive andEvent Driven Language on the
Series/1
32919, approximately 30 hours

ANS '74 COBOL Programming
88127, approximately 36 hours
This course covers language specifications
common to systems designed according to the
ANS COBOL, X3.23 standard.

6-10

IBM Series/l Digest

This course teaches the student to operate theSeries/I under Event Driven Executive. This isaccomplished by writing, debugging, andexecuting programs; using the Event Driven
Executive utilities to allocate, create, andmaintain files; generating a tailored supervisor,
and using and updating the Session Manager.

Series/1 education - classroom courses
SNA Fundamentals
32501, approximately 12 to 16 hours
This course teaches fundamentals of SNA,
functions of SNA components, and u se of SNA
commands.

Programmable Communications
Subsystem Preparation Facility
MI002, approximately 40 to 60 hours
This course is an instructor guide which canhelp personnel knowledgeable in data
communications conduct their own in-house
Programmable Communi cations Subsystem(PCS) Preparation Facility training. The
course also provides materials of instruction touse as an instructor guide for teaching students
who require machine level code to plan, correct,
and modify programs written in the assembler
language, or with the Programmable
Communications Subsystem Facility (5719-CSO).
Sample lab exercises are provided with thecourse that can be adapted to the synchronous
equipment that is attached to the user's 4987
Programmable Communications Subsystem.

Programmable Communications
Subsystem Extended Execution
SupportEvent Driven Executive and Event
Driven Language Implementation
Workshop
S3505, 3 days
This course is for application programmers who
have completed the CBT course (32907), Using
Event Driven Executive (EDX) and Event Driven
Language (EDL) on the IBM Series/I. The
lecture and lab presentation allow the student
to write, test, and debug a user-oriented
application, through the use of static screens,disk read/write operations, multitasking, PF
keys , and subroutine calls.

Event Driven Executive
Communications Facility
Installation Workshop
82550, 4 days
This course combines lecture and lab to prepare
the student to install the Communications
Facility under Event Driven Executive.

Event Driven Executive
Communications Facility
Installation Workshop, Additional
Topics
83512, 4 days

M1004, approximately 30 to 50 hours
This course is an instructor guide which canhelp personnel knowledgeable in data
communications conduct their own in-housetraining on Programmable Communications
Subsystem Extended Execution Support(5719-CSO). Application program lab exercises
are to support specific point-to-point
synchronous and asynchronous IBM devices(3741 and 3767 terminals) that attach to the4987 Programmable Communications
Subsystem.

This course combines lecture and lab to prepare
the student to use the additional functions
available with the Communications Facility
program product. These functions include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Program dispatcher
Disk queueing
Remote disk processing
Work session controller facility
Communications Facility I/O control
Channel attach feature
PC LAN Connect
Host Connect via SNA.

Chapter 6. Series/1 support services

6-11Series/1 education - classroom courses
Event Driven Executive Control andFlow Workshop

Realtime Programming System
Facilities and Operation

83503, 3-1/2 days

83511, 4 days

This course teaches advanced Event Driven
Language programming topics and the various
problem determination aids available in the
Event Driven Executive operating system, as
tools in an installation program development
effort.

This course provides Realtime Programming
System users with knowledge of the supervisor,
its operator and programmer interfaces,
utilities, and program preparation. This is donewith an emphasis on hands-on exercises.

Series/1 Transaction Processing
System Workshop

Realtime Programming System
Generation and Maintenance82519, 5 days

83513, 3 days
This course teaches how to install, tailor, andimplement the Series/1 Event Driven Executive
Transaction Processing System licensed
program by using lectures and hands-on
exerCIses.

Event Driven Language
Implementation Workshop Advanced Topics
S3509, 2 days
This course is intended for application orsystem programmers who will use the advanced
programming features of the Event Driven
Language.

This course provides Realtime Programming
System system programmers with theknowledge necessary to perform custom systemgenerations and maintenance of complex
systems.

Series/1 Transaction Processing
System Workshop
83513, 3 days
This course teaches how to install, tailor, andimplement the Series/l Realtime Programming
System Transaction Processing System licensed
program by using lectures and hands-on
exerCIses.

Communications Manager for
Series/1 Installation Workshop
D2084, 4-1/2 days
This course provides the student with thenecessary information to install the basic
Communications Manager system for message
concentration and routing. It provides thestudent with additional information forextending the basic support to otherenvironments.

6-12

IBM Series/1 Digest

Series/1 education - classroom courses
ANS '74 COBOL Batch
Programming Workshop

Series/1 SNA Interface
P2024, 3 d ays

D2085, 3 days

This course consists of lectures and exercisesthat teach COBOL batch programming skills,
and provide practice in their use.

MAP Architect ure/Application
Interface
8 3515, 2 days
This course provides a brief review of Open
Systems Interconnect (OSI) and the OSI
Reference Model. It also describes th ecomponents and services provided by the IBM
MAP Communication Server (MCS) or the MAP
Application Server (MAS) environments.

Th is is a lab and lecture class intended forexperien ced programmers. Students learn how
to write Series/l programs for the Event Driven
Execu tive or the Realtime Programming System
in order to communicate with host (8ystem/370)
application programs in an SNA environment.

Series/1 Remote Manager
Installation/Operation
83506, 2 days
This lab and lecture course teaches the student
to install and tailor the Remote Manager
licensed program, and verify the installation toa host communications and systems
management network.

MA P Application Server Workshop
8 3516, 3 days
This lab and lecture course covers MAP
Communication Server (MCS) and MAP
Application Server (MAS) installations. The lab
consists of MAS start-up and station definition.
Once the MAS system is operable, lecture andreinforcing lab exercises are alternated as
students code and debug a MAP messing
application and MAP FT AM applications.

Ch apter 6. Series/1 support services

6-13

6-14

IBM Series/I DigestIndexIndex

ACC (see asynchronous communications)additional I/O feature locations 4-3
additional IBM customer services 6-5
additional maintenance support 6-3
address bus 2-11
addressing main storage 2-5
Advanced Remote Job Entry 5-9, 5-37
Amplifier-Multirange 4-48
Analog Input Control 4-48
Analog Input-14 Bits 4-49
Analog Output 4-48
ANS '74 COBOL Batch Programming
Workshop 6-13
ANS '74 COBOL Language Fundamentals 6-10
ANS '74 COBOL Programming 6-10
Application programming
Event Driven Executive 5-20
Intelligent Work Station 5-55
Realtime Programming System 5-40
architecture 2-1
asynchronous communications (ACC) 3-28
attachment features 2-3
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
Adapter 3-19
Integrated Digital Input/Output
Non-Isolated 3-19
Multidrop Work Station Attachment 3-21
Multifunction Attachment 3-20
Printer Attachment - 5200 Series 3-22
Programmable Cycle-Stealing Digital
Input/Digital Output Attachment 3-19
Teletypewriter Adapter 3-19
Timers 3-19
automatic restart 2-14

backup processor 4-3
badge reader 4-45
Basic Supervisor and Emulator 5-3
basic supervisor, RPS 5-26
basic system functions , EDX 5-3
Basic Supervisor and Emulator 5-3
basic system functions , RPS 5-26
binary synchronous communications (BSC) 3-27
BSC (see binary synchronous communications
bus
address 2-11
data 2-11

Chain Pharmacy System 5-23
chaining 2-11
checking circuits 2-13class interrupts 2-10classroom courses 6-11
ANS '74 COBOL Batch Programming
Workshop 6-13
Communications Manager for Series/ 1
Installation Workshop 6-12,6-13
Event Driven Executive and Event Driven
Language Implementation Workshop 6-11
Event Driven Executive Communications
Facility Installation Workshop 6-11
Event Driven Executive Control and Flow
Workshop 6-12
MAP Application Server Workshop 6-13
MAP Architecture/Application Interface 6-13
Realtime Programming System Facilities andOperation 6-12
Realtime Programming System Generation and
Maintenance 6-12
Series/1 SNA Interface 6-13
Series/1 Transaction Processing System
Workshop 6-12
COBOL 5-44
COBOL for Event Driven Executive and Realtime
Programming System 5-44
command chaining 2-11commercial support, EDX 5-18
Indexed Access Method 5-18
Sort/Merge 5-19
commercial support, RPS
Indexed Access Method 5-27
Sort/Merge 5-39
communications features 3-26
asynchronous (ACC) features 3-28
Binary synchronous (BSC) features 3-27
communications support features 3-32
feature-programmable multiline communications
features 3-28
other communications features 3-31
synchronous (SDLC) features 3-27
Synchronous Communications Single-Line
Control/High Speed 3-29
Telephone Communications Controller and
Adapter 3-30
Communications Manager 5-27
Communications Manager for Series/1 Installation
Workshop 6-12,6-13
communications support features 3-32

Index

X-I

Indexcommunications support, EDX
Adva nced Remote Job Entry 5-9
MAP Application Server 5-16
Network Definition Utility 5-14
Primary SNA 5-13
Remote Manager 5-10
Support for Systems Network Architecture 5-12
System Network Architecture Version 2 5-12
Systems Network Architecture RJE
P rogr a m 5-15
X.25 /HDLC Communications Support 5-15
communications support, RPS
Advanced Remote Job Entry 5-37
Communications Manager 5-27
MAP Communications Server 5-36
Programmable Communications Subsystem 5-33
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Prepara tion Facility 5-34
Remote Management Utility 5-33
Remote Manager 5-27
X.25 /HDLC Communications Support 5-35
Communications Sys t ems Concepts 6-10
com muni cations, programmabl e subsystem 4-51
con dition codes 2-14
configura tions, 5200 Series printer s 3-22
control lin es 2-11
courses (see education)customer engin eer support 6-2
additional maintenance support 6-3
ma intenance 6-2
other 6-4
specia l diagnosti c tools 6-2
teleprocessing systems services 6-4
cycle-steal operations 2-11

data
bus 2-11
cha inin g 2-11
co llection units 4-45
entry station 4-45
integrity 2-13
stackin g 2-7
Data cha nn e l 2-11
device a ttac hment features 4-52
device support, EDX 5-17
Syste m/370 Channel Attach Support 5-17
device support, RPS 5-38
System/370 Channel Attach Support 5-38
Di gita l Input/Process Interrupt Isolated 4-48
Digital Input/Process Interrupt Non-isolated 4-48
Di gita l Output/Process Interrupt Non-isolated 4-49
direct program control operations 2-11
disk units
overview 1-6

X-2

IBM Series/1 Digest

4963 4-5
4967 4-15
diskette units
overview 1-7
4964 4-7
4965 (Model 1) 4-9
display stations
overview 1-7
3161 4-37
3162 4-39
3163 4-37
3164 4-41
4978 4-43
doubl e-vectored interrupt addressing
D02013 3-31
D02038 4-43
D02055 4-43
D02056 4-43
D02057 4-43
D02060 4-43
D02064 4-43
D02065 4-43
D02071 4-49
D02118 3-19
D02222 4-43
D02241 3-31
D02242 3-31
D02275 4-43
D02276 4-43
D02288 3-19
D02312 4-45
D02313 4-45
D02314 4-45
D02337 4-52
D02349 3-31
D02350 3-31
D02358 4-49
D02375 4-43

2-10

education
classroom courses 6-11
self-study courses 6-10
suggested course sequences 6-8, 6-9
EDX (see Event Driven Executive)engineering changes 6-4
Event Driven Executive
Advanced Remote Job Entry 5-9
application programming 5-20
Basic Supervisor and Emulator 5-3
basic system functions 5-3
Chain Pharmacy System 5-23
commercial support 5-18
description 5-2
device support 5-17

IndexGeneral Purpose Automation
Executive-Distributive 5-20
Host Preparation Facility 5-7
Indexed Access Method 5-18
Macro Assembler 5-6
Macro Library 5-6
Macro Library/Host 5-7
MAP Application Server 5-16
Network Definition Utility 5-14
Plant Automation Communication System 5-22
Primary SNA 5-13
program development 5-5
Program Preparation Facility 5-5
Remote Manager 5-10
Series/I Data Entry System (SIDES) 5-24
Series/I Store Item Management 5-22
Sort/Merge 5-19
Store Application Environment 5-52
Store Item Receiving 5-21
System Network Architecture Version 2 5-12
System/370 Channel Attach Support 5-17
Systems Network Architecture 5-12
Systems Network Architecture RJE
Program 5-15
X.25/HDLC Communications Support 5-15
Event Driven Executive and Event Driven
Language Implementation Workshop 6-11
Event Driven Executive and Event Driven
Language Implementation Workshop - Advanced
Topics 6-12
Event Driven Executive Communications Facility
Installation Workshop 6-11
Event Driven Executive Communications Facility
Installation Workshop, Additional Topics 6-11
Event Driven Executive Control and Flow
Workshop 6-12
executive overview 1-1
expansion unit, 4959 I/O 4-3
capabilities 4-3

feature locations, I/O 4-3
feature-programmable multiline communications
features 3-28
feature , attachment (see attachment features)feature, communications (see communications
features)features , by number
D02013 3-31
D02038 4-43
D02055 4-43
D02056 4-43
D02057 4-43
D02060 4-43
D02064 4-43
D02065 4-43

D02071 4-49
D02118 3-19
D02222 4-43
D02241 3-31
D02242 3-31
D02275 4-43
D02276 4-43
D02288 3-19
D02312 4-45
D02313 4-45
D02314 4-45
D02337 4-52
D02349 3-31
D02350 3-31
D02358 4-49
D02375 4-430206 3-170207 3-170210 3-170215 3-17, 4-19, 4-21
1060 4-48
1065 4-48
1070 4-48
1200 3-311204 3-171205 3-17
1220 4-17
1250 3-21
1300 4-51
1310 3-20
1400 3-31
1401 4-45
1402 4-45
1510 4-45
1520 4-45
1560 3-19
1565 4-3, 4-13
1590 4-57
1610 3-28
2000 3-32
2010 3-32
2074 3-27
2075 3-27
2080 3-29
2090 3-27
2091 3-28
2092 3-28
2093 3-27
2094 3-27
2095 3-28
2096 3-28
3000 4-19, 4-213525 4-48
3532 4-48
3535 4-49
3581 4-6
3590 4-53595 4-15
3596 4-15

Index

X-3

Index3600 4-51
3629 3-173925 3-3, 3-5, 3-11
3926 3-7, 3-9, 3-11
4000 3-23
4000 (for Proprinter) 4-19, 4-21
4100 3-5, 3-9, 4-9, 4-11
4110 3-11, 3-13
4115 3-11, 3-13, 4-13
4116 3-11, 3-13, 4-13
4117 4-13
4520 3-5, 3-9, 4-9 , 4-114521 3-11, 3-134525 4-11
4540 4-6, 4-57
4730 4-52
4731 4-52
4734 4-52
4739 4-52
4740 4-52
4743 4-52
4900 3-17, 4-19, 4-21
4940 4-49
4950 4-49
5640 3-225655 3-3, 3-5, 3-7, 3-9, 3-11, 3-13, 3-15
6305 4-46
6330 3-3, 3-7, 3-96331 3-3, 3-7, 3-96332 3-36334 3-7, 3-9, 3-11
6400 3-5 , 3-9, 4-11
7777 4-3 , 4-13
7840 3-19
7850 3-19
7880 3-30
7881 3-30
7900 4-3 , 4-9, 4-11 , 4-13
fi eld-developed programs/installed user
programs 5-56
FORTRAN 5-48
FORTRAN IV Language Fundamentals 6-10

General Purpose Automation
Executive-Distributive 5-20
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
Adapter 3-19

X-4

IBM Series/1 Digest

high-level language support 5-43
COBOL 5-44
COBOL for Event Driven Executive andRealtime Programming System 5-44
FORTRAN 5-48
Host COBOL for the Series/1 5-45
Mathematical and Functional Subroutine
Library 5-49
Pascal 5-51
PL/I 5-46
Realtime Subroutine Library 5-50
Series/1 FORTRAN IV 5-48
Series/1 PL/I 5-46
Host COBOL for the Series/1 5-45
Host Preparation Facility 5-7,5-32

I/O expansion unit
4959 4-3
4965 (Modell) 4-9
Indexed Access Method 5-18, 5-27
instruction set 2-6
instruction set summary 2-7
Integrated Digital Input/Output Non-Isolated
integrated maintenance package (IMP) 6-2
integrity of data 2-13
Intelligent Work Station 5-55
interrupt
addressing, double-vectored 2-10class 2-10
priority 2-10servicing 2-11
status byte 2-14
structure 2-10
trace class 2-10
Introduction to Series/1 Assembler Language

Job Stream Processor

5-30

3-19

6-10

Indexsupport services 1-9
system design 2-2
tape units 1-7
licensed programs 5-56
lines, control 2-11
linkage stacking 2-7

Macro Assembler 5-6
Macro Library 5-6
Macro Library/Host 5-7
main storage 2-5
maintenance 6-2
maintenance agreement 6-3
MAP Application Server (ED X) 5-16
MAP Application Server Workshop 6-13
MAP Architecture/Application Interface 6-13
MAP Communications Server (RPS) 5-36
Mathematical and Functional Subroutine
Li brary 5-49
maximum I/O feature locations 4-3
microdiagnostic routines 2-13
Multidrop Work Station Attachment 3-21
Multifunction Attachment 3-20
Multiplexer
loop 4-45
Mercury Relay 4-49
Reed Relay 4-49
Solid State 4-49

Network Definition Utility

5-14

overview
architecture 1-4
communications 1-8
customer engineers 1-9
data collection 1-7
diskette units 1-7
display stations 1-7
I/O and system support units
printers 1-7
processors and features 1-5
programming support 1-8
racks and enclosures 1-8
sensor I/O 1-7

1-6

parity checking 2-13
Pascal 5-51
PL/I 5-46
PL/I Programming 6-10
Plant Automation Communication System 5-22
power verification 2-14
power/thermal failure 2-14
Primary SNA 5-13
Printer Attachment - 5200 Series 3-22
printers
overview 1-7
4201 4-19
4202 4-21
4224 4-23
4234 4-25
4975 4-27
5219 4-29
5224 4-31
5225 4-33
5262 4-35
priority interrupts 2-10
processor structure 2-5
processors
4956 E70 3-84956 Model B10 3-24956 Model E10 3-64956 Model JOO 3-124956 Model KOO 3-144956 Model 6ID 3-4
4956 Models G10 and H10 3-104959 4-2
5170 Model 496 3-16
processors and features 3-1
program development, EDX 5-5
Host Preparation Facility 5-7
Macro Assembler 5-6
Macro Library 5-6
Macro Library/Host 5-7
Program Preparation Facility 5-5
program development, RPS 5-30
Host Preparation Facility 5-32
Job Stream Processor 5-30
Program Preparation Subsystem 5-30
program distribution, licensing, and support 5-56
field-developed programs/installed user
programs 5-56
licensed programs 5-56
programming RPQs 5-56
program polling 2-10
Program Preparation Facility 5-5
Program Preparation Subsystem 5-30
Index

X-5

Index
programmable communications subsystem 4-51
autocall 4-52
device attachment features 4-52
full -duplex digital 4-52
integrated modem 4-52
TTY current 4-52
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Execution Support 5-33
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Preparation Facility 5-34
Programmable Cycle-Stealing Digital Input/Digital
Output Attachment 3-19
programming RPQs 5-56
programming support
Event Driven Executive 5-2
basic system functions 5-3
commercial support 5-18
device support 5-17
program development 5-5
high-level language support 5-43
Realtime Programming System 5-25
basic system functions 5-26
program development 5-30

Queryrack enclosure, 4997 4-57
Realtime Programming System
Advanced Remote Job Entry 5-37
application programming 5-40
basic supervisor 5-26
basic system functions 5-26
commercial support 5-39
Communications Manager 5-27
description 5-25
device support 5-38
Host Preparation Facility 5-32
Indexed Access Method 5-27
Job Stream Processor 5-30
MAP Communications Server 5-36
program development 5-30
Program Preparation Subsystem 5-30
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Execution Support 5-33
Programmable Communications Subsystem
Preparation Facility 5-34
Remote Management Utility 5-33
Remote Manager 5-27
Series/1 Data Entry System (SIDES) 5-41
Sort/Merge 5-39

X-6

IBM Series/1 Digest

System/370 Channel Attach Support 5-38
X.25/HDLC Communications Support 5-35
Realtime Programming System Facilities andOperation 6-12
Realtime Programming System Generation and
Maintenance 6-12
Realtime Subroutine Library 5-50
redundancy checking 2-14
registers 2-7
reliability, availability, and serviceability 2-13
automatic restart 2-14
condition codes 2-14
interrupt status byte 2-14
microdiagnostic routines 2-13
parity checking 2-13
power/thermal failure 2-14
redundancy checking 2-14
Remote Management Utility 5-33
Remote Manager 5-10,5-27
RPS (see Realtime Programming System)

SDLC (see synchronous communications)self-study courses 6-10
ANS '74 COBOL Language Fundamentals 6-10
ANS '74 COBOL Programming 6-10
Communications Systems Concepts 6-10
FORTRAN IV Language Fundamentals 6-10
Introduction to Series/1 Assembler
Language 6-10
PL/I Programming 6-10
Series/1 Hardware 6-10
3270 Operation and Design 6-10
sensor input/output, 4982 4-47
Amplifier-Multirange 4-48
Analog Input Control 4-48
Analog Input-14 Bits 4-49
Analog Output 4-48
Digital Input/Process Interrupt Isolated 4-48
Digital Input/Process Interrupt
Non-isolated 4-48
Digital Output/Process Interrupt
Non-isolated 4-49
Multiplexer 4-49
Mercury Relay 4-49
Reed Relay 4-49
Solid State 4-49
Sensor-Based System Services 6-5
Series/1 architecture 2-1
processor structure 2-5
reliability, availability, and serviceability 2-13
system design 2-2
Series/1 Data Entry System (SIDES)
EDX 5-24
RPS 5-41

IndexSeries/1 education (see education)
Series/1 FORTRAN IV 5-48
Series/1 Hardware 6-10
Series/1 Input/Output Executive 5-54
Series/1 Interactive Executive 5-53
Series/1 PL/I 5-46
Series/1 SNA Interface 6-13
Series/1 Store Item Management 5-22
Series/l support services 6-1
Series/1 Transaction Processing System
Workshop 6-12
Series/1-System/370 termination enclosure,4993 4-55
Sort/Merge 5-19, 5-39
special diagnostic tools 6-2
Special Product Engineering Services 6-5
stacking
data 2-7
linkage 2-7
storage and I/O expansion unit 4-94965 (Modell) 4-9
storage mapping 2-5
storage protection 2-5Store Application Environment 5-52
Store Item Receiving 5-21
suggested course sequences 6-8 , 6-9
supervisor state 2-7
synchronous communications (SDLC) 3-27
Synchronous Communications Single-Line
Control/High Speed 3-29
system design overview 2-2
attachment features 2-3
fl exibility 2-3
I/O capacity 2-3
racks 2-2
stand-alone enclosure 2-3
technology 2-2
System Network Architecture Version 2 5-12
System Unit
5170 Model 496 3-16
System/370 Channel Attach Support 5-17, 5-38
Systems Network Architecture
EDX Network Definition Utility 5-14
EDX Primary SNA 5-13
EDX SNA Version 1 5-12
EDX SNA Version 2 5-12
Systems Network Architecture RJE Program 5-15
SIDES
EDX 5-24
RPS 5-41

tape units
overview 1-7
4968 4-17
Telephone Communications Controller and
Adapter 3-30
teleprocessing systems services 6-4
Teletypewriter Adapter 3-19
terminals (see display stations)time entry station 4-45
Timers 3-19
trace class interrupt 2-10
Two-Channel Switch 4-3 ,4-13

value read module

4-45

X.25 /HDLC Communications Support

5-15, 5-35

I Numerics I
0206
0207
0210
0215
1060
1065
1070
1200
1204
1205
1220
1250
1300
1310
1400
1401
1402
1510
1520
1560
1565
1590
1610
2000
2010

3-17
3-17
3-17
3-17,4-19,4-21
4-48
4-48
4-48
3-31
3-17
3-17
4-17
3-21
4-51
3-20
3-31
4-45
4-45
4-45
4-45
3-19
4-3 , 4-13
4-57
3-28
3-32
3-32
Index

X-7

Index2074 3-27
2075 3-27
2080 3-29
2090 3-27
2091 3-28
2092 3-28
2093 3-27
2094 3-27
2095 3-28
2096 3-28
3000 4-19, 4-21
3161 Display Station 4-37
3162 Display Station 4-39
3163 Display Station 4-37
3164 Display Station 4-41
3270 Operation and Design 6-103525 4-48
3532 4-48
3535 4-49
3581 4-6
3590 4-53595 4-15
3596 4-15
3600 4-51
3629 3-173925 3-3, 3-5, 3-11
3926 3-7, 3-9,3-11
4000 3-23
4000 (for Pro printer) 4-19 , 4-21
4100 3-5, 3-9, 4-9 , 4-11
4110 3-11 , 3-13
4115 3-11 , 3-13 , 4-13
4116 3-11 , 3-13, 4-13
4117 4-13
4201 Pro printer 4-19
4202 Pro printer XL 4-21
4224 Printer 4-23
4234 Printer (Model 2) 4-25
4520 3-5 , 3-9, 4-9, 4-114521 3-11, 3-134525 4-11
4540 4-6 , 4-57
4730 4-52
4731 4-52
4734 4-52
4739 4-52
4740 4-52
4743 4-52
4900 3-17, 4-19, 4-21
4940 4-49
4950 4-49
4956 Model BI0 Processor 3-2
4956 Model EI0 Processor 3-6
4956 Model E70 Processor 3-8
4956 Model JOO Processor 3-124956 Model KOO Processor 3-144956 Model 61D Processor 3-4
4956 Models GlO and HI0 Processors4959 I/O expansion u nit 4-2, 4-3

X -8

IBM Series/1 Digest

3-104963 Disk Subsystem 4-54964 Diskette Unit 4-74965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Model
EOO) 4-13
4965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Modell) 4-94965 Storage and I/O Expansion Unit (Model
60D) 4-11
4967 High-Performance Disk Subsystem 4-15
4968 Autoload Streaming Magnetic Tape Unit 4-174975 Printer 4-27
4978 Display Station 4-43
4982 Sensor Input/Output Unit 4-47
4987 Programmable Communications
Subsystem 4-51
4993 Series/1-System/370 Termination
Enclosure 4-55
4997 Rack Enclosure 4-57
5170 Model 496 Processor 3-16
5200 Series, Printer Attachment 3-225219 Printer 4-29
5224 Printer 4-31
5225 Printer 4-33
5230 Data Collection Units 4-45
5234 Time Entry Station 4-45
5235 Data Entry Station 4-45
5236 Data Entry Station 4-45
5239 Value Read Module 4-45
5262 Printer 4-35
5640 3-225655 3-3, 3-5 , 3-7, 3-9, 3-11, 3-13, 3-15
5719-AM4 5-18
5719-ASA 5-6
5719-AS7 5-30
5719-CAI 5-38
5719-CB5 5-44
5719-CB6 5-44
5719-CB7 5-44
5719-CB8 5-44
5719-CF2 5-11
5719-CNI 5-42
5719-CSO 5-34
5719-CS2 5-33
5719-CXl 5-17
5719-DSD 5-21
5719-EMI 5-54
5719-F02 5-48
5719-F04 5-50
5719-HDI 5-35
5719-HD2 5-15
5719-LM2 5-49
5719-LM3 5-49
5719-LM9 5-6
5719-PC7 5-26
5719-PJ7 5-29
5719-PL2 5-46
5719-PL4 5-46
5719-PL5 5-46
5719-PL6 5-46
5719-RJ1 5-9

---./

.

Index5719-RJ6 5-37
5719-RM1 5-10
5719-SM1 5-39
5719-SM2 5-19
5719-SX1 5-125719-SX2 5-15
5719-TR6 5-31
5719-UN1 5-53
5719-XS5 5-35719-XT1 5-16
5719-XT3 5-40
5719-XT4 5-13
5719-XT5 5-14
5719-XX6 5-5
5719-XX9 5-125719-YT7 5-52
5740-LM6 5-7
5796-ZDE 5-41
5796-ZDF 5-24
5798-DRX 5-22
5798-FAS 5-20
5798-RGD 5-23

5798-RTE 5-22
5799-BNA 5-7, 5-32
5799-TEC 5-30
5799-TEF 5-33
5799-TEL 5-45
5799-TEP 5-45
5799-TEQ 5-51
5799-TER 5-51
5799-TNG 5-55
5799-XT2 5-366305 4-46
6330 3-3, 3-7, 3-96331 3-3, 3-7, 3-96332 3-36334 3-7, 3-9, 3-11
6400 3-5, 3-9, 4-11
7777 4-3 , 4-13
7840 3-19
7850 3-19
7880 3-30
7881 3-30
7900 4-3 , 4-9, 4-11 , 4-13

Index

X-9

-- ~
-=-- -:--::-=.
--~ - -::§'f~

International Business Mach in es Corporation

G360-0061-11

G360 -006 1 -11
Printed in U .S.A.